From: mdw Date: Wed, 5 May 1999 19:23:46 +0000 (+0000) Subject: Initial revision X-Git-Tag: 1.2.0^0 X-Git-Url: https://git.distorted.org.uk/~mdw/cfd/commitdiff_plain/b91e23910ae2f433757880fa1c7e7b4a66c586e6 Initial revision --- b91e23910ae2f433757880fa1c7e7b4a66c586e6 diff --git a/.skelrc b/.skelrc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3b4e199 --- /dev/null +++ b/.skelrc @@ -0,0 +1,9 @@ +;;; -*-emacs-lisp-*- + +(setq skel-alist + (append + '((author . "Mark Wooding") + (full-title . "the Common Files Distribution (`common')") + (Program . "`Common'") + (program . "`common'")) + skel-alist)) diff --git a/COPYING b/COPYING new file mode 100644 index 0000000..916d1f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/COPYING @@ -0,0 +1,339 @@ + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it +free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest +to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least +the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + + Copyright (C) 19yy + + This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software + Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + +If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this +when it starts in an interactive mode: + + Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author + Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + +The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate +parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may +be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be +mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your +school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if +necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + + Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program + `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. + + , 1 April 1989 + Ty Coon, President of Vice + +This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into +proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may +consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the +library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General +Public License instead of this License. diff --git a/COPYING.LIB b/COPYING.LIB new file mode 100644 index 0000000..161a3d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/COPYING.LIB @@ -0,0 +1,482 @@ + GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + +[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is + numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.] + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change +free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. + + This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some +specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any +other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for +your libraries, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if +you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis +or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave +you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source +code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide +complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them +with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling +it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. + + Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright +the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal +permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. + + Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original +version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on +the original authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free +software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect +transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this, +we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's +free use or not licensed at all. + + Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary +GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This +license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain +designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary +one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is +the same as in the ordinary license. + + The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that +they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a +program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without +changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is +analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in +a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a +derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License +treats it as such. + + Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General +Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software +sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We +concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better. + + However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the +users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the +libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to +permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while +preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free +libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve +this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards +changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this +will lead to faster development of free libraries. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a +"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The +former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only +works together with the library. + + Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary +General Public License rather than by this special one. + + GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library which +contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized +party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library +General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is +addressed as "you". + + A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data +prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs +(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. + + The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work +which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the +Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under +copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a +portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated +straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is +included without limitation in the term "modification".) + + "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means +all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated +interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation +and installation of the library. + + Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from +such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based +on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for +writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does +and what the program that uses the Library does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's +complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that +you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an +appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact +all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any +warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the +Library. + + You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, +and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a +fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The modified work must itself be a software library. + + b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no + charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. + + d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a + table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses + the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility + is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, + in the event an application does not supply such function or + table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of + its purpose remains meaningful. + + (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has + a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the + application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any + application-supplied function or table used by this function must + be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square + root function must still compute square roots.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote +it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Library. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library +with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public +License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do +this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so +that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, +instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the +ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify +that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in +these notices. + + Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for +that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all +subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. + + This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of +the Library into a program that is not a library. + + 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or +derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form +under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany +it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which +must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a +medium customarily used for software interchange. + + If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy +from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the +source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to +distribute the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the +Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or +linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a +work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and +therefore falls outside the scope of this License. + + However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library +creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it +contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the +library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. +Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. + + When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file +that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a +derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. +Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be +linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The +threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. + + If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data +structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline +functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object +file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative +work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the +Library will still fall under Section 6.) + + Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may +distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. +Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, +whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. + + 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or +link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a +work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work +under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit +modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse +engineering for debugging such modifications. + + You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the +Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by +this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work +during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the +copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference +directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one +of these things: + + a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding + machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever + changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under + Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked + with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that + uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the + user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified + executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood + that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the + Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application + to use the modified definitions.) + + b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at + least three years, to give the same user the materials + specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more + than the cost of performing this distribution. + + c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy + from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above + specified materials from the same place. + + d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these + materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. + + For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the +Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for +reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, +the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally +distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major +components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on +which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies +the executable. + + It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license +restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally +accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot +use both them and the Library together in an executable that you +distribute. + + 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the +Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library +facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined +library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on +the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise +permitted, and provided that you do these two things: + + a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work + based on the Library, uncombined with any other library + facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the + Sections above. + + b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact + that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining + where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. + + 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute +the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any +attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or +distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your +rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, +or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses +terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. + + 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the +Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Library or works based on it. + + 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the +Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library +subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any +particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, +and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add +an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, +so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus +excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if +written in the body of this License. + + 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new +versions of the Library General Public License from time to time. +Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, +but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and +"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and +conditions either of that version or of any later version published by +the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a +license version number, you may choose any version ever published by +the Free Software Foundation. + + 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, +write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is +copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free +Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our +decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status +of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing +and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO +WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. +EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR +OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY +KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR +PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE +LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME +THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN +WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY +AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU +FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR +CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE +LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING +RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A +FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF +SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGES. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries + + If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that +everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting +redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the +ordinary General Public License). + + To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is +safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the +"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + + Copyright (C) + + This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or + modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public + License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either + version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + + This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU + Library General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public + License along with this library; if not, write to the Free + Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, + MA 02111-1307, USA + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your +school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if +necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + + Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the + library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. + + , 1 April 1990 + Ty Coon, President of Vice + +That's all there is to it! diff --git a/INSTALL b/INSTALL new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3b50ea9 --- /dev/null +++ b/INSTALL @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +Basic Installation +================== + + These are generic installation instructions. + + The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for +various system-dependent variables used during compilation. It uses +those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package. +It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent +definitions. Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that +you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, a file +`config.cache' that saves the results of its tests to speed up +reconfiguring, and a file `config.log' containing compiler output +(useful mainly for debugging `configure'). + + If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try +to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail +diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can +be considered for the next release. If at some point `config.cache' +contains results you don't want to keep, you may remove or edit it. + + The file `configure.in' is used to create `configure' by a program +called `autoconf'. You only need `configure.in' if you want to change +it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version of `autoconf'. + +The simplest way to compile this package is: + + 1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type + `./configure' to configure the package for your system. If you're + using `csh' on an old version of System V, you might need to type + `sh ./configure' instead to prevent `csh' from trying to execute + `configure' itself. + + Running `configure' takes a while. While running, it prints some + messages telling which features it is checking for. + + 2. Type `make' to compile the package. + + 3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with + the package. + + 4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and + documentation. + + 5. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the + source code directory by typing `make clean'. To also remove the + files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for + a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'. There is + also a `make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly + for the package's developers. If you use it, you may have to get + all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came + with the distribution. + +Compilers and Options +===================== + + Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that +the `configure' script does not know about. You can give `configure' +initial values for variables by setting them in the environment. Using +a Bourne-compatible shell, you can do that on the command line like +this: + CC=c89 CFLAGS=-O2 LIBS=-lposix ./configure + +Or on systems that have the `env' program, you can do it like this: + env CPPFLAGS=-I/usr/local/include LDFLAGS=-s ./configure + +Compiling For Multiple Architectures +==================================== + + You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the +same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their +own directory. To do this, you must use a version of `make' that +supports the `VPATH' variable, such as GNU `make'. `cd' to the +directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run +the `configure' script. `configure' automatically checks for the +source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'. + + If you have to use a `make' that does not supports the `VPATH' +variable, you have to compile the package for one architecture at a time +in the source code directory. After you have installed the package for +one architecture, use `make distclean' before reconfiguring for another +architecture. + +Installation Names +================== + + By default, `make install' will install the package's files in +`/usr/local/bin', `/usr/local/man', etc. You can specify an +installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving `configure' the +option `--prefix=PATH'. + + You can specify separate installation prefixes for +architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files. If you +give `configure' the option `--exec-prefix=PATH', the package will use +PATH as the prefix for installing programs and libraries. +Documentation and other data files will still use the regular prefix. + + If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed +with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the +option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'. + +Optional Features +================= + + Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to +`configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package. +They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE +is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System). The +`README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the +package recognizes. + + For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually +find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't, +you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and +`--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations. + +Specifying the System Type +========================== + + There may be some features `configure' can not figure out +automatically, but needs to determine by the type of host the package +will run on. Usually `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints +a message saying it can not guess the host type, give it the +`--host=TYPE' option. TYPE can either be a short name for the system +type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name with three fields: + CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM + +See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field. If +`config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't +need to know the host type. + + If you are building compiler tools for cross-compiling, you can also +use the `--target=TYPE' option to select the type of system they will +produce code for and the `--build=TYPE' option to select the type of +system on which you are compiling the package. + +Sharing Defaults +================ + + If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share, +you can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives +default values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'. +`configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then +`PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists. Or, you can set the +`CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script. +A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script. + +Operation Controls +================== + + `configure' recognizes the following options to control how it +operates. + +`--cache-file=FILE' + Use and save the results of the tests in FILE instead of + `./config.cache'. Set FILE to `/dev/null' to disable caching, for + debugging `configure'. + +`--help' + Print a summary of the options to `configure', and exit. + +`--quiet' +`--silent' +`-q' + Do not print messages saying which checks are being made. + +`--srcdir=DIR' + Look for the package's source code in directory DIR. Usually + `configure' can determine that directory automatically. + +`--version' + Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure' + script, and exit. + +`configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options. + diff --git a/Makefile.am b/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..28ed467 --- /dev/null +++ b/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +## Process this file with Automake to generate `Makefile.in' +## -*-Makefile-*- +## +## $Id: Makefile.am,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ +## +## Building the distribution +## +## (c) 1997 Mark Wooding +## + +##----- Licensing notice ---------------------------------------------------- +## +## This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common') +## +## `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +## it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +## the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +## (at your option) any later version. +## +## `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +## but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +## MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +## GNU General Public License for more details. +## +## You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +## along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +## Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +##----- Revision history ---------------------------------------------------- +## +## $Log: Makefile.am,v $ +## Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw +## Initial revision +## + +## --- Options --- + +AUTOMAKE_OPTIONS = foreign + +## --- What needs building --- + +bin_SCRIPTS = mklinks findlinks txtlib mkaclocal + +## --- Files to install in the repository --- + +pkgdata_DATA = \ + COPYING COPYING.LIB INSTALL \ + ansi2knr.1 ansi2knr.c \ + gpl.tex lgpl.tex gpl.texi lgpl.texi texinfo.tex texinice.tex \ + aclocal.glob \ + mdwopt.c mdwopt.h + +EXTRA_DIST = $(pkgdata_DATA) + +pkgdata_SCRIPTS = \ + config.guess config.sub elisp-comp install-sh \ + mdate-sh missing mkinstalldirs ylwrap + +## --- Documentation --- + +info_TEXINFOS = common.texi + +## --- Cleaning up --- + +CLEANFILES = $(bin_SCRIPTS) diff --git a/aclocal.glob b/aclocal.glob new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cf5334f --- /dev/null +++ b/aclocal.glob @@ -0,0 +1,1331 @@ +dnl -*-fundamental-*- *@--GLOB-HEADER--@* +dnl +dnl $Id: aclocal.glob,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ +dnl +dnl Common library of autoconf macros +dnl +dnl (c) 1997 Mark Wooding, except for macros and documentation where noted. +dnl + +dnl----- Licensing notice --------------------------------------------------- +dnl +dnl This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common') +dnl +dnl `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +dnl it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +dnl the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +dnl (at your option) any later version. +dnl +dnl `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +dnl but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +dnl MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +dnl GNU General Public License for more details. +dnl +dnl You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +dnl along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +dnl Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +dnl----- Revision history --------------------------------------------------- +dnl +dnl $Log: aclocal.glob,v $ +dnl Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw +dnl Initial revision +dnl + +dnl----- Common files distribution --------------------------- *@--NOTICE--@* +dnl +dnl $Id: aclocal.glob,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ + +dnl --- *@-AC_PROG_CC_STDC-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Franc,ois Pinard +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AC_PROG_CC_STDC +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: If the C compiler in not in ANSI C mode by default, try to +dnl add an option to output variable `CC' to make it so. This +dnl macro tries various options that select ANSI C on some system +dnl or another. It considers the compiler to be in ANSI C mode +dnl if it defines `__STDC__' to 1 and handles function prototypes +dnl correctly. +dnl +dnl If you use this macro, you should check after calling it +dnl whether the C compiler has been set to accept ANSI C; if not, +dnl the shell variable `ac_cv_prog_cc_stdc' is set to `no'. If +dnl you wrote your source code in ANSI C, you can make an +dnl un-ANSIfied copy of it by using the program `ansi2knr', which +dnl comes with Ghostscript. +dnl +dnl (documentation by Franc,ois Pinard) + +AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_CC_STDC, +[AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC]) +AC_BEFORE([$0], [AC_C_INLINE]) +AC_BEFORE([$0], [AC_C_CONST]) +AC_MSG_CHECKING(for ${CC-cc} option to accept ANSI C) +AC_CACHE_VAL(am_cv_prog_cc_stdc, +[am_cv_prog_cc_stdc=no +ac_save_CC="$CC" +# Don't try gcc -ansi; that turns off useful extensions and +# breaks some systems' header files. +# AIX -qlanglvl=ansi +# Ultrix and OSF/1 -std1 +# HP-UX -Aa -D_HPUX_SOURCE +# SVR4 -Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__ +for ac_arg in "" -qlanglvl=ansi -std1 "-Aa -D_HPUX_SOURCE" "-Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__" +do + CC="$ac_save_CC $ac_arg" + AC_TRY_COMPILE( +[#if !defined(__STDC__) || __STDC__ != 1 +choke me +#endif +/* DYNIX/ptx V4.1.3 can't compile sys/stat.h with -Xc -D__EXTENSIONS__. */ +#ifdef _SEQUENT_ +# include +# include +#endif +], [ +int test (int i, double x); +struct s1 {int (*f) (int a);}; +struct s2 {int (*f) (double a);};], +[am_cv_prog_cc_stdc="$ac_arg"; break]) +done +CC="$ac_save_CC" +]) +if test -z "$am_cv_prog_cc_stdc"; then + AC_MSG_RESULT([none needed]) +else + AC_MSG_RESULT($am_cv_prog_cc_stdc) +fi +case "x$am_cv_prog_cc_stdc" in + x|xno) ;; + *) CC="$CC $am_cv_prog_cc_stdc" ;; +esac +]) + +dnl----- AutoMake macros ------------------------------------- *@--IGNORE--@* + +dnl --- *@-AM_CONDITIONAL-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Unknown +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_CONDITIONAL(NAME, TEST) +dnl +dnl Arguments: NAME = name of the conditional +dnl TEST = a shell list to execute +dnl +dnl Use: Allows conditional sections in Makefiles. + +AC_DEFUN(AM_CONDITIONAL, +[AC_SUBST($1_TRUE) +AC_SUBST($1_FALSE) +if $2; then + $1_TRUE= + $1_FALSE='#' +else + $1_TRUE='#' + $1_FALSE= +fi]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_CYGWIN32-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Cygnus (I guess) +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_CYGWIN32 +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Check to see if we're running under Cygwin32, without using +dnl AC_CANONICAL_*. If so, set output variable EXEEXT to +dnl ".exe". Otherwise set it to "". + +dnl AM_CYGWIN32() +dnl You might think we can do this by checking for a cygwin32-specific +dnl cpp define. We can't, because cross-compilers that target +dnl cygwin32 don't use the .exe suffix. I don't know why. +AC_DEFUN(AM_CYGWIN32, +[AC_CACHE_CHECK(for Cygwin32 environment, am_cv_cygwin32, +[cat > conftest.$ac_ext << 'EOF' +int main () { +/* Nothing. */ +return 0; } +EOF +if AC_TRY_EVAL(ac_link) && test -s conftest.exe; then + am_cv_cygwin32=yes +else + am_cv_cygwin32=no +fi +rm -f conftest*]) +EXEEXT= +test "$am_cv_cygwin32" = yes && EXEEXT=.exe +AC_SUBST(EXEEXT)]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_WITH_DMALLOC-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Franc,ois Pinard +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_WITH_DMALLOC +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Links with `-dmalloc' if told to by the user. + +## ----------------------------------- ## +## Check if --with-dmalloc was given. ## +## From Franc,ois Pinard ## +## ----------------------------------- ## + +# serial 1 + +AC_DEFUN(AM_WITH_DMALLOC, +[AC_MSG_CHECKING(if malloc debugging is wanted) +AC_ARG_WITH(dmalloc, +[ --with-dmalloc use dmalloc, as in + ftp://ftp.letters.com/src/dmalloc/dmalloc.tar.gz], +[if test "$withval" = yes; then + AC_MSG_RESULT(yes) + AC_DEFINE(WITH_DMALLOC) + LIBS="$LIBS -ldmalloc" + LDFLAGS="$LDFLAGS -g" +else + AC_MSG_RESULT(no) +fi], [AC_MSG_RESULT(no)]) +]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_ERROR_AT_LINE-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Jim Meyering +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_FUNC_ERROR_AT_LINE +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Use this if you use the GNU error.[ch]. + +dnl FIXME: Migrate into libit + +AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_ERROR_AT_LINE, +[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for error_at_line], am_cv_lib_error_at_line, + [AC_TRY_LINK([],[error_at_line(0, 0, "", 0, "");], + am_cv_lib_error_at_line=yes, + am_cv_lib_error_at_line=no)]) + if test $am_cv_lib_error_at_line = no; then + LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS error.o" + fi + AC_SUBST(LIBOBJS)dnl +]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_INIT_GUILE_MODULE-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Unknown +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_INIT_GUILE_MODULE(MODNAME) +dnl +dnl Arguments: MODNAME = value to initialise `module' variable with +dnl +dnl Use: This macro will automatically get the guile version from the +dnl top-level srcdir, and will initialize automake. It also +dnl defines the `module' variable. + +AC_DEFUN([AM_INIT_GUILE_MODULE],[ +. $srcdir/../GUILE-VERSION +AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE($PACKAGE, $VERSION) +AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR(..) +module=[$1] +AC_SUBST(module)]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_CONFIG_HEADER-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Unknown +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_CONFIG_HEADER(HEADER ...) +dnl +dnl Arguments: HEADER = a header spec, as for AC_CONFIG_HEADER +dnl +dnl Use: Like AC_CONFIG_HEADER, but automatically create stamp file. + +AC_DEFUN(AM_CONFIG_HEADER, +[AC_PREREQ([2.12]) +AC_CONFIG_HEADER([$1]) +dnl When config.status generates a header, we must update the stamp-h file. +dnl This file resides in the same directory as the config header +dnl that is generated. We must strip everything past the first ":", +dnl and everything past the last "/". +AC_OUTPUT_COMMANDS(changequote(<<,>>)dnl +ifelse(patsubst(<<$1>>, <<[^ ]>>, <<>>), <<>>, +<>CONFIG_HEADERS" || echo timestamp > patsubst(<<$1>>, <<^\([^:]*/ +\)?.*>>, <<\1>>)stamp-h<<>>dnl>>, +<>; do + case " <<$>>CONFIG_HEADERS " in + *" <<$>>am_file "*<<)>> + echo timestamp > `echo <<$>>am_file | sed -e 's%:.*%%' -e 's%[^/]*$%%'`stamp-h$am_indx + ;; + esac + am_indx=`expr "<<$>>am_indx" + 1` +done<<>>dnl>>) +changequote([,]))]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE-@* +dnl +dnl Author: Unknown +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(PACKAGE, VERSION, [NO-DEFINE]) +dnl +dnl Arguments: PACKAGE = package name +dnl VERSION = version number +dnl NO-DEFINE = if set, don't define package and version number +dnl +dnl Use: Do all the work for Automake. This macro actually does too +dnl much -- some checks are only needed if your package does +dnl certain things. But this isn't really a big deal. + +# serial 1 + +AC_DEFUN(AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE, +[AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_INSTALL]) +PACKAGE=[$1] +AC_SUBST(PACKAGE) +VERSION=[$2] +AC_SUBST(VERSION) +dnl test to see if srcdir already configured +if test "`cd $srcdir && pwd`" != "`pwd`" && test -f $srcdir/config.status; then + AC_MSG_ERROR([source directory already configured; run "make distclean" there first]) +fi +ifelse([$3],, +AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(PACKAGE, "$PACKAGE") +AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(VERSION, "$VERSION")) +AM_SANITY_CHECK +AC_ARG_PROGRAM +dnl FIXME This is truly gross. +missing_dir=`cd $ac_aux_dir && pwd` +AM_MISSING_PROG(ACLOCAL, aclocal, $missing_dir) +AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOCONF, autoconf, $missing_dir) +AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOMAKE, automake, $missing_dir) +AM_MISSING_PROG(AUTOHEADER, autoheader, $missing_dir) +AM_MISSING_PROG(MAKEINFO, makeinfo, $missing_dir) +AC_PROG_MAKE_SET]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_PROG_INSTALL-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Franc,ois Pinard +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_PROG_INSTALL +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Calls `AC_PROG_INSTALL' to find an installer. Then it sets +dnl `INSTALL_SCRIPT' to a suitable value if necessary. + +# serial 1 + +AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_INSTALL, +[AC_PROG_INSTALL +test -z "$INSTALL_SCRIPT" && INSTALL_SCRIPT='${INSTALL} -m 755' +AC_SUBST(INSTALL_SCRIPT)dnl +]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_PROG_LEX-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Alexandre Oliva +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_PROG_LEX +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Replacement for AC_PROG_LEX and AC_DECL_YYTEXT + +dnl AM_PROG_LEX +dnl Look for flex, lex or missing, then run AC_PROG_LEX and AC_DECL_YYTEXT +AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_LEX, +[missing_dir=ifelse([$1],,`cd $ac_aux_dir && pwd`,$1) +AC_CHECK_PROGS(LEX, flex lex, "$missing_dir/missing flex") +AC_PROG_LEX +AC_DECL_YYTEXT]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_PROG_LIBTOOL-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Unknown +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_PROG_LIBTOOL +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Configures `libtool' for the target architecture. + +## +## Configure libtool for the target system. +## +# serial 1 AM_PROG_LIBTOOL +AC_DEFUN(AM_PROG_LIBTOOL, +[AC_REQUIRE([AC_CANONICAL_HOST]) +AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_CC]) +AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_RANLIB]) + +# Always use our own libtool. +LIBTOOL='$(top_builddir)/libtool' +AC_SUBST(LIBTOOL) + +dnl Allow the --disable-shared flag to stop us from building shared libs. +AC_ARG_ENABLE(shared, +[ --enable-shared build shared libraries [default=yes]], +test "$enableval" = no && libtool_shared=" --disable-shared", +libtool_shared=) + +libtool_flags="$libtool_shared" +test "$silent" = yes && libtool_flags="$libtool_flags --silent" +test "$ac_cv_prog_gcc" = yes && libtool_flags="$libtool_flags --with-gcc" + +# Actually configure libtool. ac_aux_dir is where install-sh is found. +CC="$CC" CFLAGS="$CFLAGS" CPPFLAGS="$CPPFLAGS" LD="$LD" RANLIB="$RANLIB" \ +$ac_aux_dir/ltconfig $libtool_flags --no-verify $ac_aux_dir/ltmain.sh $host \ +|| AC_MSG_ERROR([libtool configure failed]) +]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_PATH_LISPDIR-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Ulrich Drepper +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_PATH_LISPDIR +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Sets the variable `lispdir' to point to a place to install +dnl Emacs lisp files. + +## ------------------------ +## Emacs LISP file handling +## From Ulrich Drepper +## ------------------------ + +# serial 1 + +AC_DEFUN(AM_PATH_LISPDIR, + [# If set to t, that means we are running in a shell under Emacs. + # If you have an Emacs named "t", then use the full path. + test "$EMACS" = t && EMACS= + AC_PATH_PROG(EMACS, emacs xemacs, no) + if test $EMACS != "no"; then + AC_MSG_CHECKING([where .elc files should go]) + dnl Set default value + lispdir="\$(datadir)/emacs/site-lisp" + if test "x$prefix" = "xNONE"; then + if test -d $ac_default_prefix/share/emacs/site-lisp; then + lispdir="\$(prefix)/share/emacs/site-lisp" + else + if test -d $ac_default_prefix/lib/emacs/site-lisp; then + lispdir="\$(prefix)/lib/emacs/site-lisp" + fi + fi + else + if test -d $prefix/share/emacs/site-lisp; then + lispdir="\$(prefix)/share/emacs/site-lisp" + else + if test -d $prefix/lib/emacs/site-lisp; then + lispdir="\$(prefix)/lib/emacs/site-lisp" + fi + fi + fi + AC_MSG_RESULT($lispdir) + fi + AC_SUBST(lispdir)]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_MAINTAINTER_MODE-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Jim Meyering +dnl +dnl Synopsis: jm_MAINTAINER_MODE +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Provides an option `--enable-maintainer-mode' which turns +dnl on rules which might normally be commented out. The +dnl substitution variable `MAINT' is set to be a comment when +dnl this option is disabled, which it is by default. + +# serial 1 + +AC_DEFUN(AM_MAINTAINER_MODE, +[AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether to enable maintainer-specific portions of Makefiles]) + dnl maintainer-mode is disabled by default + AC_ARG_ENABLE(maintainer-mode, +[ --enable-maintainer-mode enable make rules and dependencies not useful + (and sometimes confusing) to the casual installer], + USE_MAINTAINER_MODE=$enableval, + USE_MAINTAINER_MODE=no) + AC_MSG_RESULT($USE_MAINTAINER_MODE) + if test $USE_MAINTAINER_MODE = yes; then + MAINT= + else + MAINT='#M#' + fi + AC_SUBST(MAINT)dnl +] +) + +dnl --- *@-AM_MISSING_PROG-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Unknown +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_MISSING_PROG(NAME, PROGRAM, DIRECTORY) +dnl +dnl Arguments: NAME = variable to set to the file's location +dnl PROGRAM = name of program to find +dnl DIRECTORY = directory to look in +dnl +dnl Use: Fakes existence of a useful GNU maintainer tool. + +AC_DEFUN(AM_MISSING_PROG, +[AC_MSG_CHECKING(for working $2) +# Run test in a subshell; some versions of sh will print an error if +# an executable is not found, even if stderr is redirected. +# Redirect stdin to placate older versions of autoconf. Sigh. +if ($2 --version) < /dev/null > /dev/null 2>&1; then + $1=$2 + AC_MSG_RESULT(found) +else + $1="$3/missing $2" + AC_MSG_RESULT(missing) +fi +AC_SUBST($1)]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_MKTIME-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Jim Meyering +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_FUNC_MKTIME +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Checks for a working mktime function. + +AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_MKTIME, +[AC_REQUIRE([AC_HEADER_TIME])dnl + AC_CHECK_HEADERS(sys/time.h) + AC_CACHE_CHECK([for working mktime], am_cv_func_working_mktime, + [AC_TRY_RUN( +changequote(<<, >>)dnl +< +# include +#else +# if HAVE_SYS_TIME_H +# include +# else +# include +# endif +#endif + +static time_t time_t_max; + +/* Values we'll use to set the TZ environment variable. */ +static const char *const tz_strings[] = { + NULL, "GMT0", "JST-9", "EST+3EDT+2,M10.1.0/00:00:00,M2.3.0/00:00:00" +}; +#define N_STRINGS (sizeof (tz_strings) / sizeof (tz_strings[0])) + +static void +mktime_test (now) + time_t now; +{ + if (mktime (localtime (&now)) != now) + exit (1); + now = time_t_max - now; + if (mktime (localtime (&now)) != now) + exit (1); +} + +int +main () +{ + time_t t, delta; + int i; + + for (time_t_max = 1; 0 < time_t_max; time_t_max *= 2) + continue; + time_t_max--; + delta = time_t_max / 997; /* a suitable prime number */ + for (i = 0; i < N_STRINGS; i++) + { + if (tz_strings[i]) + putenv (tz_strings[i]); + + for (t = 0; t <= time_t_max - delta; t += delta) + mktime_test (t); + mktime_test ((time_t) 60 * 60); + mktime_test ((time_t) 60 * 60 * 24); + } + exit (0); +} + >>, +changequote([, ])dnl + am_cv_func_working_mktime=yes, am_cv_func_working_mktime=no, + dnl When crosscompiling, assume mktime is missing or broken. + am_cv_func_working_mktime=no) + ]) + if test $am_cv_func_working_mktime = no; then + LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS mktime.o" + fi +]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_OBSTACK-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Jim Meyering +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_FUNC_OBSTACK +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Checks for GNU obstacks. + +AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_OBSTACK, +[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for obstacks], am_cv_func_obstack, + [AC_TRY_LINK([#include "obstack.h"], + [struct obstack *mem;obstack_free(mem,(char *) 0)], + am_cv_func_obstack=yes, + am_cv_func_obstack=no)]) + if test $am_cv_func_obstack = yes; then + AC_DEFINE(HAVE_OBSTACK) + else + LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS obstack.o" + fi +]) + +dnl --- *@-AC_C_PROTOTYPES-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Franc,ois Pinard +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AC_C_PROTOTYPES +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: If the C compiler understands ANSI C, define `PROTOTYPES', +dnl and clear the `U' and `ANSI2KNR' variables. Otherwise, +dnl set `U' to be `_' and `ANSI2KNR' to be `./ansi2knr'. + +# serial 1 + +AC_DEFUN(fp_C_PROTOTYPES, +[AC_REQUIRE([fp_PROG_CC_STDC]) +AC_MSG_CHECKING([for function prototypes]) +if test "$ac_cv_prog_cc_stdc" != no; then + AC_MSG_RESULT(yes) + AC_DEFINE(PROTOTYPES) + U= ANSI2KNR= +else + AC_MSG_RESULT(no) + U=_ ANSI2KNR=./ansi2knr +fi +AC_SUBST(U)dnl +AC_SUBST(ANSI2KNR)dnl +]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_PATH_GTK-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Owen Taylor +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_PATH_GTK(MIN-VERSION, [ACTION-IF-FOUND], [ACTION-IF-NOT]) +dnl +dnl Arguments: MIN-VERSION = minimum version of GTK required +dnl ACTION-IF-FOUND = executed if GTK found OK +dnl ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND = what to do if GTK not available +dnl +dnl Use: Sets up compilation environment suitably for GTK programming. + +# Configure paths for GTK+ +# Owen Taylor 97-11-3 + +dnl AM_PATH_GTK([MINIMUM-VERSION, [ACTION-IF-FOUND [, ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND]]]) +dnl Test for GTK, and define GTK_CFLAGS and GTK_LIBS +dnl +AC_DEFUN(AM_PATH_GTK, +[dnl +dnl Get the cflags and libraries from the gtk-config script +dnl +AC_ARG_WITH(gtk-prefix,[ --with-gtk-prefix=PFX Prefix where GTK is installed (optional)], + gtk_config_prefix="$withval", gtk_config_prefix="") +AC_ARG_WITH(gtk-exec-prefix,[ --with-gtk-exec-prefix=PFX Exec prefix where GTK is installed (optional)], + gtk_config_exec_prefix="$withval", gtk_config_exec_prefix="") +AC_ARG_ENABLE(gtktest, [ --disable-gtktest Do not try to compile and run a test GTK program], + , enable_gtktest=yes) + + if test x$gtk_config_exec_prefix != x ; then + gtk_config_args="$gtk_config_args --exec-prefix=$gtk_config_exec_prefix" + if test x${GTK_CONFIG+set} != xset ; then + GTK_CONFIG=$gtk_config_exec_prefix/bin/gtk-config + fi + fi + if test x$gtk_config_prefix != x ; then + gtk_config_args="$gtk_config_args --prefix=$gtk_config_prefix" + if test x${GTK_CONFIG+set} != xset ; then + GTK_CONFIG=$gtk_config_prefix/bin/gtk-config + fi + fi + + AC_PATH_PROG(GTK_CONFIG, gtk-config, no) + min_gtk_version=ifelse([$1], ,0.99.7,$1) + AC_MSG_CHECKING(for GTK - version >= $min_gtk_version) + no_gtk="" + if test "$GTK_CONFIG" = "no" ; then + no_gtk=yes + else + GTK_CFLAGS=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --cflags` + GTK_LIBS=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --libs` + gtk_config_major_version=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --version | \ + sed 's/\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\)/\1/'` + gtk_config_minor_version=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --version | \ + sed 's/\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\)/\2/'` + gtk_config_micro_version=`$GTK_CONFIG $gtk_config_args --version | \ + sed 's/\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\).\([[0-9]]*\)/\3/'` + if test "x$enable_gtktest" = "xyes" ; then + ac_save_CFLAGS="$CFLAGS" + ac_save_LIBS="$LIBS" + CFLAGS="$CFLAGS $GTK_CFLAGS" + LIBS="$LIBS $GTK_LIBS" +dnl +dnl Now check if the installed GTK is sufficiently new. (Also sanity +dnl checks the results of gtk-config to some extent +dnl + rm -f conf.gtktest + AC_TRY_RUN([ +#include +#include + +int +main () +{ + int major, minor, micro; + char *tmp_version; + + system ("touch conf.gtktest"); + + /* HP/UX 9 (%@#!) writes to sscanf strings */ + tmp_version = g_strdup("$min_gtk_version"); + if (sscanf(tmp_version, "%d.%d.%d", &major, &minor, µ) != 3) { + printf("%s, bad version string\n", "$min_gtk_version"); + exit(1); + } + + if ((gtk_major_version != $gtk_config_major_version) || + (gtk_minor_version != $gtk_config_minor_version) || + (gtk_micro_version != $gtk_config_micro_version)) + { + printf("\n*** 'gtk-config --version' returned %d.%d.%d, but GTK+ (%d.%d.%d)\n", + $gtk_config_major_version, $gtk_config_minor_version, $gtk_config_micro_version, + gtk_major_version, gtk_minor_version, gtk_micro_version); + printf ("*** was found! If gtk-config was correct, then it is best\n"); + printf ("*** to remove the old version of GTK+. You may also be able to fix the error\n"); + printf("*** by modifying your LD_LIBRARY_PATH enviroment variable, or by editing\n"); + printf("*** /etc/ld.so.conf. Make sure you have run ldconfig if that is\n"); + printf("*** required on your system.\n"); + printf("*** If gtk-config was wrong, set the environment variable GTK_CONFIG\n"); + printf("*** to point to the correct copy of gtk-config, and remove the file config.cache\n"); + printf("*** before re-running configure\n"); + } + else + { + if ((gtk_major_version > major) || + ((gtk_major_version == major) && (gtk_minor_version > minor)) || + ((gtk_major_version == major) && (gtk_minor_version == minor) && (gtk_micro_version >= micro))) + { + return 0; + } + else + { + printf("\n*** An old version of GTK+ (%d.%d.%d) was found.\n", + gtk_major_version, gtk_minor_version, gtk_micro_version); + printf("*** You need a version of GTK+ newer than %d.%d.%d. The latest version of\n", + major, minor, micro); + printf("*** GTK+ is always available from ftp://ftp.gtk.org.\n"); + printf("***\n"); + printf("*** If you have already installed a sufficiently new version, this error\n"); + printf("*** probably means that the wrong copy of the gtk-config shell script is\n"); + printf("*** being found. The easiest way to fix this is to remove the old version\n"); + printf("*** of GTK+, but you can also set the GTK_CONFIG environment to point to the\n"); + printf("*** correct copy of gtk-config. (In this case, you will have to\n"); + printf("*** modify your LD_LIBRARY_PATH enviroment variable, or edit /etc/ld.so.conf\n"); + printf("*** so that the correct libraries are found at run-time))\n"); + } + } + return 1; +} +],, no_gtk=yes,[echo $ac_n "cross compiling; assumed OK... $ac_c"]) + CFLAGS="$ac_save_CFLAGS" + LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS" + fi + fi + if test "x$no_gtk" = x ; then + AC_MSG_RESULT(yes) + ifelse([$2], , :, [$2]) + else + AC_MSG_RESULT(no) + if test "$GTK_CONFIG" = "no" ; then + echo "*** The gtk-config script installed by GTK could not be found" + echo "*** If GTK was installed in PREFIX, make sure PREFIX/bin is in" + echo "*** your path, or set the GTK_CONFIG environment variable to the" + echo "*** full path to gtk-config." + else + if test -f conf.gtktest ; then + : + else + echo "*** Could not run GTK test program, checking why..." + CFLAGS="$CFLAGS $GTK_CFLAGS" + LIBS="$LIBS $GTK_LIBS" + AC_TRY_LINK([ +#include +#include +], [ return ((gtk_major_version) || (gtk_minor_version) || (gtk_micro_version)); ], + [ echo "*** The test program compiled, but did not run. This usually means" + echo "*** that the run-time linker is not finding GTK or finding the wrong" + echo "*** version of GTK. If it is not finding GTK, you'll need to set your" + echo "*** LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable, or edit /etc/ld.so.conf to point" + echo "*** to the installed location Also, make sure you have run ldconfig if that" + echo "*** is required on your system" + echo "***" + echo "*** If you have an old version installed, it is best to remove it, although" + echo "*** you may also be able to get things to work by modifying LD_LIBRARY_PATH" + echo "***" + echo "*** If you have a RedHat 5.0 system, you should remove the GTK package that" + echo "*** came with the system with the command" + echo "***" + echo "*** rpm --erase --nodeps gtk gtk-devel" ], + [ echo "*** The test program failed to compile or link. See the file config.log for the" + echo "*** exact error that occured. This usually means GTK was incorrectly installed" + echo "*** or that you have moved GTK since it was installed. In the latter case, you" + echo "*** may want to edit the gtk-config script: $GTK_CONFIG" ]) + CFLAGS="$ac_save_CFLAGS" + LIBS="$ac_save_LIBS" + fi + fi + GTK_CFLAGS="" + GTK_LIBS="" + ifelse([$3], , :, [$3]) + fi + AC_SUBST(GTK_CFLAGS) + AC_SUBST(GTK_LIBS) + rm -f conf.gtktest +]) + +dnl --- *@-AC_TYPE_PTRDIFF_T-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Ulrich Drepper +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AC_TYPE_PTRDIFF_T +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Sets HAVE_PTRDIFF_T if the type exists. + +AC_DEFUN(AM_TYPE_PTRDIFF_T, + [AC_CACHE_CHECK([for ptrdiff_t], am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t, + [AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include ], [ptrdiff_t p], + am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t=yes, am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t=no)]) + if test $am_cv_type_ptrdiff_t = yes; then + AC_DEFINE(HAVE_PTRDIFF_T) + fi +]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_WITH_REGEX-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Unknown (possibly Franc,ois Pinard) +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_WITH_REGEX +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: +dnl The idea is to distribute rx.[hc] and regex.[hc] together, +dnl for a while. The WITH_REGEX symbol (which should also be +dnl documented in acconfig.h) is used to decide which of regex.h +dnl or rx.h should be included in the application. If +dnl `./configure --with-regex' is given (the default), the +dnl package will use gawk's regex. If `./configure +dnl --without-regex', a check is made to see if rx is already +dnl installed, as with newer Linux'es. If not found, the package +dnl will use the rx from the distribution. If found, the package +dnl will use the system's rx which, on Linux at least, will +dnl result in a smaller executable file. + +AC_DEFUN(AM_WITH_REGEX, +[AC_MSG_CHECKING(which of GNU rx or gawk's regex is wanted) +AC_ARG_WITH(regex, +[ --without-regex use GNU rx in lieu of gawk's regex for matching], +[test "$withval" = yes && am_with_regex=1], +[am_with_regex=1]) +if test -n "$am_with_regex"; then + AC_MSG_RESULT(regex) + AC_DEFINE(WITH_REGEX) + AC_CACHE_CHECK([for GNU regex in libc], am_cv_gnu_regex, + AC_TRY_LINK([], [extern int re_max_failures; re_max_failures = 1], + am_cv_gnu_regex=yes, am_cv_gnu_regex=no)) + if test $am_cv_gnu_regex = no; then + LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS regex.o" + fi +else + AC_MSG_RESULT(rx) + AC_CHECK_FUNC(re_rx_search, , [LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS rx.o"]) +fi +AC_SUBST(LIBOBJS)dnl +]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_SANITY_CHECK-@* +dnl +dnl Author: Unknown +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_SANITY_CHECK +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Check for build environment sanity. + +AC_DEFUN(AM_SANITY_CHECK, +[AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether build environment is sane]) +# Just in case +sleep 1 +echo timestamp > conftestfile +# Do `set' in a subshell so we don't clobber the current shell's +# arguments. Must try -L first in case configure is actually a +# symlink; some systems play weird games with the mod time of symlinks +# (eg FreeBSD returns the mod time of the symlink's containing +# directory). +if ( + set X `ls -Lt $srcdir/configure conftestfile 2> /dev/null` + if test "$@" = "X"; then + # -L didn't work. + set X `ls -t $srcdir/configure conftestfile` + fi + test "[$]2" = conftestfile + ) +then + # Ok. + : +else + AC_MSG_ERROR([newly created file is older than distributed files! +Check your system clock]) +fi +rm -f conftest* +AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_FUNC_STRDOD-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Jim Meyering +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_FUNC_STRTOD +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Checks for a working strtod function. + +## Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +## This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +## it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +## the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) +## any later version. + +## This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +## but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +## MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +## GNU General Public License for more details. + +## You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +## along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +## Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA +## 02111-1307, USA. + +## From Jim Meyering. + +## serial 1 + +## @defmac AC_FUNC_STRTOD +## @maindex FUNC_STRTOD +## @ovindex LIBOBJS +## If the @code{strtod} function is not available, or does not work +## correctly (like the one on SunOS 5.4), add @samp{strtod.o} to output +## variable @code{LIBOBJS}. +## @end defmac + +AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_STRTOD, +[AC_CACHE_CHECK(for working strtod, am_cv_func_strtod, +[AC_TRY_RUN([ +double strtod (); +int +main() +{ + { + /* Some versions of Linux strtod mis-parse strings with leading '+'. */ + char *string = " +69"; + char *term; + double value; + value = strtod (string, &term); + if (value != 69 || term != (string + 4)) + exit (1); + } + + { + /* Under Solaris 2.4, strtod returns the wrong value for the + terminating character under some conditions. */ + +## @defmac AC_FUNC_STRTOD +## @maindex FUNC_STRTOD +## @ovindex LIBOBJS +## If the @code{strtod} function is not available, or does not work +## correctly (like the one on SunOS 5.4), add @samp{strtod.o} to output +## variable @code{LIBOBJS}. +## @end defmac + +AC_DEFUN(AM_FUNC_STRTOD, +[AC_CACHE_CHECK(for working strtod, am_cv_func_strtod, +[AC_TRY_RUN([ +double strtod (); +int +main() +{ + { + /* Some versions of Linux strtod mis-parse strings with leading '+'. */ + char *string = " +69"; + char *term; + double value; + value = strtod (string, &term); + if (value != 69 || term != (string + 4)) + exit (1); + } + + { + /* Under Solaris 2.4, strtod returns the wrong value for the + terminating character under some conditions. */ + char *string = "NaN"; + char *term; + strtod (string, &term); + if (term != string && *(term - 1) == 0) + exit (1); + } + exit (0); +} +], am_cv_func_strtod=yes, am_cv_func_strtod=no, am_cv_func_strtod=no)]) +test $am_cv_func_strtod = no && LIBOBJS="$LIBOBJS strtod.o" +AC_SUBST(LIBOBJS)dnl +am_cv_func_strtod_needs_libm=no +if test $am_cv_func_strtod = no; then + AC_CHECK_FUNCS(pow) + if test $ac_cv_func_pow = no; then + AC_CHECK_LIB(m, pow, [am_cv_func_strtod_needs_libm=yes], + [AC_MSG_WARN(can't find library containing definition of pow)]) + fi +fi +]) + +dnl --- *@-AM_SYS_POSIX_TERMIOS-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Jim Meyering +dnl +dnl Synopsis: AM_SYS_POSIX_TERMIOS +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Checks for a POSIX termios.h. + +AC_DEFUN(AM_SYS_POSIX_TERMIOS, +[AC_CACHE_CHECK([POSIX termios], am_cv_sys_posix_termios, + [AC_TRY_LINK([#include +#include +#include ], + [/* SunOS 4.0.3 has termios.h but not the library calls. */ + tcgetattr(0, 0);], + am_cv_sys_posix_termios=yes, + am_cv_sys_posix_termios=no)]) +]) + +dnl----- Macros by Mark Wooding ------------------------------ *@--IGNORE--@* + +dnl --- *@-mdw_REQUIRE-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Mark Wooding +dnl +dnl Synopsis: mdw_REQUIRE(MACRO, ARGS...) +dnl +dnl Arguments: MACRO = name of a macro which should have been called +dnl ARGS = arguments to pass +dnl +dnl Use: Like `AC_REQUIRE', only it handles arguments. + +AC_DEFUN(mdw_REQUIRE, +[ifdef([AC_PROVIDED_$1], , +[AC_DIVERT_PUSH(builtin(eval, AC_DIVERSION_CURRENT - 1))dnl +indir($@) +AC_DIVERT_POP()dnl +])]) + +dnl --- *@-mdw_CHECK_MANYLIBS-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Mark Wooding +dnl +dnl Synopsis: mdw_CHECK_MANYLIBS(FUNC, LIBS, [IF-FOUND], [IF-NOT-FOUND]) +dnl +dnl Arguments: FUNC = a function to try to find +dnl LIBS = a whitespace-separated list of libraries to search +dnl IF-FOUND = what to do when the function is found +dnl IF-NOT-FOUND = what to do when the function isn't found +dnl +dnl Use: Searches for a library which defines FUNC. It first tries +dnl without any libraries; then it tries each library specified +dnl in LIBS in turn. If it finds a match, it adds the +dnl appropriate library to `LIBS'. +dnl +dnl This is particularly handy under DIREIX: if you link with +dnl `-lnsl' then you get non-NIS-aware versions of getpwnam and +dnl so on, which is clearly a Bad Thing. + +AC_DEFUN(mdw_CHECK_MANYLIBS, +[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for library containing $1], [mdw_cv_lib_$1], +[mdw_save_LIBS="$LIBS" +mdw_cv_lib_$1="no" +AC_TRY_LINK(,[$1()], [mdw_cv_lib_$1="none required"]) +test "$mdw_cv_lib_$1" = "no" && for i in $2; do +LIBS="-l$i $mdw_save_LIBS" +AC_TRY_LINK(,[$1()], +[mdw_cv_lib_$1="-l$i" +break]) +done +LIBS="$mdw_save_LIBS"]) +if test "$mdw_cv_lib_$1" != "no"; then + test "$mdw_cv_lib_$1" = "none required" || LIBS="$mdw_cv_lib_$1 $LIBS" + $3 +else : + $4 +fi]) + +dnl --- *@-mdw__PERL_VERSION-@* --- +dnl +dnl AC_DEFUN relies on `[', `]' being quotes, so I have to drop down a level. + +changequote(<<, >>) +define(mdw__PERL_VERSION, <<$1 -e 'exit ($] < $2);' >&5 2>&5>>) +changequote([, ]) + +dnl --- *@-mdw_PROG_PERL-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Mark Wooding +dnl +dnl Synopsis: mdw_PROG_PERL(VERSION, [IF-FOUND], [IF-NOT-FOUND]) +dnl +dnl Arguments: VERSION = version number of Perl required +dnl IF-FOUND = what to do if it's found +dnl IF-NOT-FOUND = what to do if it isn't +dnl +dnl Use: Attempts to find a working version of Perl with a late +dnl enough version number. It supplies an option `--with-perl' +dnl to allow the user to provide a Perl interpreter. If one +dnl isn't provided explicitly, it searches for `perl' and `perl5' +dnl in the current PATH, asking them whether they have a late +dnl enough version number. The path of the working Perl is +dnl put into the `PERL' environment variable; `AC_SUBST' is used +dnl to substitute its value into Perl scripts. If there is no +dnl Perl to be found, the value of `PERL' is set to be `none'. + +AC_DEFUN(mdw_PROG_PERL, +[AC_ARG_WITH([perl], +[ --with-perl=PERL specify path to Perl version $1 or newer], +[PERL="$withval"], +if test -z "$PERL"; then +[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for Perl version $1 or later], mdw_cv_prog_perl, +[mdw_cv_prog_perl="none" +for p in `echo "$PATH:/usr/local/bin" | tr ":" " "`; do + case $p in /*) ;; *) p=`pwd`/$p ;; esac + if mdw__PERL_VERSION(["$p/perl"], $1); then + mdw_cv_prog_perl="$p/perl" + break + fi + if mdw__PERL_VERSION(["$p/perl5"], $1); then + mdw_cv_prog_perl="$p/perl5" + break + fi +done]) +PERL="$mdw_cv_prog_perl"]) +fi + +AC_SUBST(PERL)dnl +if test "$PERL" = "none"; then : + $3 +else : + $2 +fi]) + +dnl --- *@-mdw_CHECK_PERL-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Mark Wooding +dnl +dnl Synopsis: mdw_CHECK_PERL(VERSION) +dnl +dnl Arguments: VERSION = version number of Perl required +dnl +dnl Use: Verifies that the Perl interpreter in the `PERL' shell +dnl variable actually works and is of the right version. If it's +dnl not, an error is raised and configuration is aborted. + +AC_DEFUN(mdw_CHECK_PERL, +[mdw_REQUIRE([mdw_PROG_PERL], [$1]) +AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether Perl ($PERL) works]) +if test "$PERL" != "none" && mdw__PERL_VERSION("$PERL", $1); then + AC_MSG_RESULT([yes]) +else + AC_MSG_RESULT([no]) + AC_MSG_ERROR([Perl version $1 or newer not found. +If you have a recent enough Perl, and I just failed to find it, try using +the --with-perl=PERL option to give me an explicit pathname.]) +fi]) + +dnl --- *@-mdw_PERLLIB_CHECK-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Mark Wooding +dnl +dnl Synopsis: mdw_PERLLIB_CHECK(LIBRARY) +dnl +dnl Arguments: LIBRARY = name of a Perl library to check for +dnl +dnl Use: Ensures that a Perl script can `use LIBRARY;'. If it can, +dnl all's well and good; if it can't, `LIBRARY.pm' is added to +dnl the variable `NEEDED_PERLLIBS' and a line which adds +dnl `pkgdatadir' to Perl's `@INC' array is placed in the +dnl variable `INC_PERLLIBS'; `AC_SUBST' is called for both of +dnl these variables. It's expected that `NEEDED_PERLLIBS' will +dnl be used in the `Makefile.in' to decide which versions from +dnl the distribution need installing. +dnl +dnl This macro isn't terribly useful in the general case. It +dnl Also implicitly assumes that `$PERL' is Perl 5 or later. + +AC_DEFUN(mdw__PERLLIB_INIT, +[AC_SUBST(INC_PERLLIBS)dnl +AC_SUBST(NEEDED_PERLLIBS)dnl +]) + +AC_DEFUN(mdw_PERLLIB_CHECK, +[AC_REQUIRE([mdw__PERLLIB_INIT]) +mdw_REQUIRE([mdw_CHECK_PERL], 5) +AC_CACHE_CHECK([for Perl library $1], mdw_cv_perllib_$1, +[if $PERL -e 'use $1;' >&5 2>&5; then + mdw_cv_perllib_$1="yes" +else + mdw_cv_perllib_$1="no" +fi]) + +if test "$mdw_cv_perllib_$1" = "no"; then + NEEDED_PERLLIBS="$NEEDED_PERLLIBS $1.pm" + + # --- Deal with autoconf lossage --- + # + # It doesn't want to define `prefix' until rather later on, so I have + # to bodge it here. + + if test -z "$INC_PERLLIBS"; then + mdw_old_prefix="$prefix" + test "$prefix" = "NONE" && prefix="$ac_default_prefix"; + INC_PERLLIBS="BEGIN { push @INC, \"`eval echo $datadir/$PACKAGE`\"; }" + prefix="$mdw_old_prefix"; + fi +fi]) + +dnl --- *@-mdw_GCC_FLAGS-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Mark Wooding +dnl +dnl Synopsis: mdw_GCC_FLAGS([FLAGS], [CFLAGS], [C++FLAGS]) +dnl +dnl Arguments: FLAGS = GCC compiler flags to add (default is +dnl `-pedantic -Wall') +dnl CFLAGS = GCC C compiler flags to add (default is empty) +dnl C++FLAGS = GCC C++ compiler flags to add (default is +dnl `-fhandle-exceptions'). +dnl +dnl Use: If the C compiler is GCC, add the compiler flags. + +AC_DEFUN(mdw_GCC_FLAGS, +[if test "$GCC" = "yes"; then + CFLAGS="$CFLAGS ifelse([$1], [], [-pedantic -Wall], [$1])" + CFLAGS="$CFLAGS ifelse([$2], [], [], [$2])" +fi +if test "$GXX" = "yes"; then + CXXFLAGS="$CXXFLAGS ifelse([$1], [], [-pedantic -Wall], [$1])" + CXXFLAGS="$CXXFLAGS ifelse([$3], [], [-fhandle-exceptions], [$3])" +fi]) + +dnl --- *@-mdw_OPT_NDEBUG-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Mark Wooding +dnl +dnl Synopsis: mdw_OPT_NDEBUG +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Turns off the `NDEBUG' flag if the user wants to do +dnl debugging. + +AC_DEFUN(mdw_OPT_NDEBUG, +[AC_ARG_ENABLE(debugging, +[ --enable-debugging spews vast swathes of useless information], +[if test "$enableval" = "no"; then + AC_DEFINE(NDEBUG, 1) +fi], +[AC_DEFINE(NDEBUG, 1)])]) + +dnl --- *@-mdw_OPT_EFENCE-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Mark Wooding +dnl +dnl Synopsis: mdw_OPT_EFENCE +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Links with the Electric Fence library. + +AC_DEFUN(mdw_OPT_EFENCE, +[AC_ARG_WITH(electric-fence, +[ --with-electric-fence link programs with Electric Fence], +[if test "$withval" = "yes"; then + AC_CHECK_LIB(efence, malloc) +fi])]) + +dnl --- *@-mdw_OPT_mLib_DEBUG-@* --- +dnl +dnl Author: Mark Wooding +dnl +dnl Synopsis: mdw_OPT_mLib_DEBUG(PROGRAM) +dnl +dnl Arguments: --- +dnl +dnl Use: Provides options for mLib debugging. In particular, the +dnl following are defined: +dnl +dnl --enable-tracing turns off the NTRACE variable +dnl --enable-track turns on malloc tracking +dnl --enable-blame-PROGRAM tracks malloc contexts in PROGRAM +dnl +dnl There must be a separate `blame' option, so that the various +dnl blame options work properly. + +AC_DEFUN(mdw_OPT_mLib_DEBUG, +[mdw_OPT_NDEBUG +mdw_OPT_EFENCE + +AC_ARG_ENABLE(tracing, +[ --enable-tracing enable output of tracing information], +[if test "$enableval" = "no"; then + AC_DEFINE(NTRACE, 1) +fi], +[AC_DEFINE(NTRACE, 1)]) + +AC_ARG_ENABLE(track, +[ --enable-track enable tracking of malloc and free], +[AC_DEFINE(TRACK_ENABLE, 1)]) + +AC_ARG_ENABLE(blame-$1, +[ --enable-blame-$1 + track malloc contexts while in $1], +[AC_DEFINE(TRACK_BLAME, 1)])]) + +dnl----- That's all, folks --------------------------------- *@--GLOB-END--@* diff --git a/ansi2knr.1 b/ansi2knr.1 new file mode 100644 index 0000000..434ce8f --- /dev/null +++ b/ansi2knr.1 @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +.TH ANSI2KNR 1 "31 December 1990" +.SH NAME +ansi2knr \- convert ANSI C to Kernighan & Ritchie C +.SH SYNOPSIS +.I ansi2knr +input_file output_file +.SH DESCRIPTION +If no output_file is supplied, output goes to stdout. +.br +There are no error messages. +.sp +.I ansi2knr +recognizes functions by seeing a non-keyword identifier at the left margin, followed by a left parenthesis, with a right parenthesis as the last character on the line. It will recognize a multi-line header if the last character on each line but the last is a left parenthesis or comma. These algorithms ignore whitespace and comments, except that the function name must be the first thing on the line. +.sp +The following constructs will confuse it: +.br + - Any other construct that starts at the left margin and follows the above syntax (such as a macro or function call). +.br + - Macros that tinker with the syntax of the function header. diff --git a/ansi2knr.c b/ansi2knr.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9bcc4ad --- /dev/null +++ b/ansi2knr.c @@ -0,0 +1,439 @@ +/* Copyright (C) 1989, 1991, 1993, 1994 Aladdin Enterprises. All rights reserved. */ + +/* ansi2knr.c */ +/* Convert ANSI function declarations to K&R syntax */ + +/* +ansi2knr is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts responsibility +to anyone for the consequences of using it or for whether it serves any +particular purpose or works at all, unless he says so in writing. Refer +to the GNU General Public License for full details. + +Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute +ansi2knr, but only under the conditions described in the GNU +General Public License. A copy of this license is supposed to have been +given to you along with ansi2knr so you can know your rights and +responsibilities. It should be in a file named COPYLEFT. Among other +things, the copyright notice and this notice must be preserved on all +copies. +*/ + +/* + * Usage: + ansi2knr [--varargs] input_file [output_file] + * If no output_file is supplied, output goes to stdout. + * There are no error messages. + * + * ansi2knr recognizes function definitions by seeing a non-keyword + * identifier at the left margin, followed by a left parenthesis, + * with a right parenthesis as the last character on the line. + * It will recognize a multi-line header provided that the last character + * of the last line of the header is a right parenthesis, + * and no intervening line ends with a left brace or a semicolon. + * These algorithms ignore whitespace and comments, except that + * the function name must be the first thing on the line. + * The following constructs will confuse it: + * - Any other construct that starts at the left margin and + * follows the above syntax (such as a macro or function call). + * - Macros that tinker with the syntax of the function header. + * + * If the --varargs switch is supplied, ansi2knr will attempt to + * convert a ... argument to va_alist and va_dcl. If this switch is not + * supplied, ansi2knr will simply drop any such arguments. + */ + +/* + * The original and principal author of ansi2knr is L. Peter Deutsch + * . Other authors are noted in the change history + * that follows (in reverse chronological order): + lpd 94-10-10 removed CONFIG_BROKETS conditional + lpd 94-07-16 added some conditionals to help GNU `configure', + suggested by Francois Pinard ; + properly erase prototype args in function parameters, + contributed by Jim Avera ; + correct error in writeblanks (it shouldn't erase EOLs) + lpd 89-xx-xx original version + */ + +/* Most of the conditionals here are to make ansi2knr work with */ +/* the GNU configure machinery. */ + +#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H +# include +#endif + +#include +#include + +#ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H + +/* + For properly autoconfiguring ansi2knr, use AC_CONFIG_HEADER(config.h). + This will define HAVE_CONFIG_H and so, activate the following lines. + */ + +# if STDC_HEADERS || HAVE_STRING_H +# include +# else +# include +# endif + +#else /* not HAVE_CONFIG_H */ + +/* + Without AC_CONFIG_HEADER, merely use as in the original + Ghostscript distribution. This loses on older BSD systems. + */ + +# include + +#endif /* not HAVE_CONFIG_H */ + +#ifdef STDC_HEADERS +# include +#else +/* + malloc and free should be declared in stdlib.h, + but if you've got a K&R compiler, they probably aren't. + */ +char *malloc(); +void free(); +#endif + +/* Scanning macros */ +#define isidchar(ch) (isalnum(ch) || (ch) == '_') +#define isidfirstchar(ch) (isalpha(ch) || (ch) == '_') + +/* Forward references */ +char *skipspace(); +void writeblanks(); +int test1(); +int convert1(); + +/* The main program */ +int +main(argc, argv) + int argc; + char *argv[]; +{ FILE *in, *out; +#define bufsize 5000 /* arbitrary size */ + char *buf; + char *line; + int convert_varargs = 0; + if ( argc > 1 && argv[1][0] == '-' ) + { if ( !strcmp(argv[1], "--varargs") ) + { convert_varargs = 1; + argc--; + argv++; + } + else + { fprintf(stderr, "Unrecognized switch: %s\n", argv[1]); + exit(1); + } + } + switch ( argc ) + { + default: + printf("Usage: ansi2knr [--varargs] input_file [output_file]\n"); + exit(0); + case 2: + out = stdout; + break; + case 3: + out = fopen(argv[2], "w"); + if ( out == NULL ) + { fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open output file %s\n", argv[2]); + exit(1); + } + } + in = fopen(argv[1], "r"); + if ( in == NULL ) + { fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open input file %s\n", argv[1]); + exit(1); + } + fprintf(out, "#line 1 \"%s\"\n", argv[1]); + buf = malloc(bufsize); + line = buf; + while ( fgets(line, (unsigned)(buf + bufsize - line), in) != NULL ) + { switch ( test1(buf) ) + { + case 2: /* a function header */ + convert1(buf, out, 1, convert_varargs); + break; + case 1: /* a function */ + convert1(buf, out, 0, convert_varargs); + break; + case -1: /* maybe the start of a function */ + line = buf + strlen(buf); + if ( line != buf + (bufsize - 1) ) /* overflow check */ + continue; + /* falls through */ + default: /* not a function */ + fputs(buf, out); + break; + } + line = buf; + } + if ( line != buf ) fputs(buf, out); + free(buf); + fclose(out); + fclose(in); + return 0; +} + +/* Skip over space and comments, in either direction. */ +char * +skipspace(p, dir) + register char *p; + register int dir; /* 1 for forward, -1 for backward */ +{ for ( ; ; ) + { while ( isspace(*p) ) p += dir; + if ( !(*p == '/' && p[dir] == '*') ) break; + p += dir; p += dir; + while ( !(*p == '*' && p[dir] == '/') ) + { if ( *p == 0 ) return p; /* multi-line comment?? */ + p += dir; + } + p += dir; p += dir; + } + return p; +} + +/* + * Write blanks over part of a string. + * Don't overwrite end-of-line characters. + */ +void +writeblanks(start, end) + char *start; + char *end; +{ char *p; + for ( p = start; p < end; p++ ) + if ( *p != '\r' && *p != '\n' ) *p = ' '; +} + +/* + * Test whether the string in buf is a function definition. + * The string may contain and/or end with a newline. + * Return as follows: + * 0 - definitely not a function definition; + * 1 - definitely a function definition; + * 2 - definitely a function prototype (NOT USED); + * -1 - may be the beginning of a function definition, + * append another line and look again. + * The reason we don't attempt to convert function prototypes is that + * Ghostscript's declaration-generating macros look too much like + * prototypes, and confuse the algorithms. + */ +int +test1(buf) + char *buf; +{ register char *p = buf; + char *bend; + char *endfn; + int contin; + if ( !isidfirstchar(*p) ) + return 0; /* no name at left margin */ + bend = skipspace(buf + strlen(buf) - 1, -1); + switch ( *bend ) + { + case ';': contin = 0 /*2*/; break; + case ')': contin = 1; break; + case '{': return 0; /* not a function */ + default: contin = -1; + } + while ( isidchar(*p) ) p++; + endfn = p; + p = skipspace(p, 1); + if ( *p++ != '(' ) + return 0; /* not a function */ + p = skipspace(p, 1); + if ( *p == ')' ) + return 0; /* no parameters */ + /* Check that the apparent function name isn't a keyword. */ + /* We only need to check for keywords that could be followed */ + /* by a left parenthesis (which, unfortunately, is most of them). */ + { static char *words[] = + { "asm", "auto", "case", "char", "const", "double", + "extern", "float", "for", "if", "int", "long", + "register", "return", "short", "signed", "sizeof", + "static", "switch", "typedef", "unsigned", + "void", "volatile", "while", 0 + }; + char **key = words; + char *kp; + int len = endfn - buf; + while ( (kp = *key) != 0 ) + { if ( strlen(kp) == len && !strncmp(kp, buf, len) ) + return 0; /* name is a keyword */ + key++; + } + } + return contin; +} + +/* Convert a recognized function definition or header to K&R syntax. */ +int +convert1(buf, out, header, convert_varargs) + char *buf; + FILE *out; + int header; /* Boolean */ + int convert_varargs; /* Boolean */ +{ char *endfn; + register char *p; + char **breaks; + unsigned num_breaks = 2; /* for testing */ + char **btop; + char **bp; + char **ap; + char *vararg = 0; + /* Pre-ANSI implementations don't agree on whether strchr */ + /* is called strchr or index, so we open-code it here. */ + for ( endfn = buf; *(endfn++) != '('; ) ; +top: p = endfn; + breaks = (char **)malloc(sizeof(char *) * num_breaks * 2); + if ( breaks == 0 ) + { /* Couldn't allocate break table, give up */ + fprintf(stderr, "Unable to allocate break table!\n"); + fputs(buf, out); + return -1; + } + btop = breaks + num_breaks * 2 - 2; + bp = breaks; + /* Parse the argument list */ + do + { int level = 0; + char *lp = NULL; + char *rp; + char *end = NULL; + if ( bp >= btop ) + { /* Filled up break table. */ + /* Allocate a bigger one and start over. */ + free((char *)breaks); + num_breaks <<= 1; + goto top; + } + *bp++ = p; + /* Find the end of the argument */ + for ( ; end == NULL; p++ ) + { switch(*p) + { + case ',': + if ( !level ) end = p; + break; + case '(': + if ( !level ) lp = p; + level++; + break; + case ')': + if ( --level < 0 ) end = p; + else rp = p; + break; + case '/': + p = skipspace(p, 1) - 1; + break; + default: + ; + } + } + /* Erase any embedded prototype parameters. */ + if ( lp ) + writeblanks(lp + 1, rp); + p--; /* back up over terminator */ + /* Find the name being declared. */ + /* This is complicated because of procedure and */ + /* array modifiers. */ + for ( ; ; ) + { p = skipspace(p - 1, -1); + switch ( *p ) + { + case ']': /* skip array dimension(s) */ + case ')': /* skip procedure args OR name */ + { int level = 1; + while ( level ) + switch ( *--p ) + { + case ']': case ')': level++; break; + case '[': case '(': level--; break; + case '/': p = skipspace(p, -1) + 1; break; + default: ; + } + } + if ( *p == '(' && *skipspace(p + 1, 1) == '*' ) + { /* We found the name being declared */ + while ( !isidfirstchar(*p) ) + p = skipspace(p, 1) + 1; + goto found; + } + break; + default: goto found; + } + } +found: if ( *p == '.' && p[-1] == '.' && p[-2] == '.' ) + { if ( convert_varargs ) + { *bp++ = "va_alist"; + vararg = p-2; + } + else + { p++; + if ( bp == breaks + 1 ) /* sole argument */ + writeblanks(breaks[0], p); + else + writeblanks(bp[-1] - 1, p); + bp--; + } + } + else + { while ( isidchar(*p) ) p--; + *bp++ = p+1; + } + p = end; + } + while ( *p++ == ',' ); + *bp = p; + /* Make a special check for 'void' arglist */ + if ( bp == breaks+2 ) + { p = skipspace(breaks[0], 1); + if ( !strncmp(p, "void", 4) ) + { p = skipspace(p+4, 1); + if ( p == breaks[2] - 1 ) + { bp = breaks; /* yup, pretend arglist is empty */ + writeblanks(breaks[0], p + 1); + } + } + } + /* Put out the function name and left parenthesis. */ + p = buf; + while ( p != endfn ) putc(*p, out), p++; + /* Put out the declaration. */ + if ( header ) + { fputs(");", out); + for ( p = breaks[0]; *p; p++ ) + if ( *p == '\r' || *p == '\n' ) + putc(*p, out); + } + else + { for ( ap = breaks+1; ap < bp; ap += 2 ) + { p = *ap; + while ( isidchar(*p) ) + putc(*p, out), p++; + if ( ap < bp - 1 ) + fputs(", ", out); + } + fputs(") ", out); + /* Put out the argument declarations */ + for ( ap = breaks+2; ap <= bp; ap += 2 ) + (*ap)[-1] = ';'; + if ( vararg != 0 ) + { *vararg = 0; + fputs(breaks[0], out); /* any prior args */ + fputs("va_dcl", out); /* the final arg */ + fputs(bp[0], out); + } + else + fputs(breaks[0], out); + } + free((char *)breaks); + return 0; +} diff --git a/common.texi b/common.texi new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d480dee --- /dev/null +++ b/common.texi @@ -0,0 +1,329 @@ +\input texinfo.tex @c -*-texinfo-*- +@c +@c $Id: common.texi,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ +@c +@c Documentation for `common' +@c +@c (c) 1997 Mark Wooding +@c + +@c ----- Licensing notice --------------------------------------------------- +@c +@c This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common'). +@c +@c `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +@c it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +@c the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +@c (at your option) any later version. +@c +@c `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +@c but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +@c MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +@c GNU General Public License for more details. +@c +@c You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +@c along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +@c Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +@c ----- Standard boilerplate header ---------------------------------------- + +@c --- Formatting header --- + +@c %**start of header +@setfilename common.info +@settitle The Common Files Distribution +@paragraphindent 0 +@iftex +@input texinice +@afourpaper +@end iftex +@include version.texi +@c %**end of header + +@c --- Info directory entry --- + +@direntry +* Common: (common). The Common Files Distribution. +@end direntry + +@c ----- Introductory stuff and copyright pages ----------------------------- +@c +@c Yes indeed, by the way: I'm willing to allow a translation approved +@c by the FSF, not me. I can't be bothered to vet translations. + +@c --- Info version --- + +@ifinfo + +This file documents version @value{VERSION} of the Common Files Distribution. + +Copyright (c) 1997 Mark Wooding + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this +manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are +preserved on all copies. + +@ignore +Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the +results, provided the printed document carries a copying permission +notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph +(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual). + +@end ignore +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the +sections entitled `Copying' and `GNU General Public License' are +included exactly as in the original, and provided that the entire +resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission +notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, +except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation +approved by the Free Software Foundation. + +@end ifinfo + +@c --- Printed version --- + +@titlepage +@title The Common Files Distribution +@subtitle version @value{VERSION} +@author Mark Wooding +@page +@vskip 0pt plus 1 filll + +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this +manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are +preserved on all copies. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the +sections entitled `Copying' and `GNU General Public License' are +included exactly as in the original, and provided that the entire +resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission +notice identical to this one. + +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, +except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation +approved by the Free Software Foundation. + +@end titlepage + + +@c -------------------------------------------------------------------------- +@ifinfo +@node Top, Copying, (dir), (dir) +@unnumbered The Common Files Distribution + + +The Common Files Distribution provides a convenient way to manage files +shared between a number of developments. + +This manual documents version @value{VERSION} of the Common Files +Distribution. + +@end ifinfo + +@menu +* Copying:: +* Introduction:: +* The file repository:: +* Text libraries:: + + --- The Detailed Node Listing --- + +The file repository + +* The mklinks command:: +* The findlinks command:: + +Text libraries + +* Anatomy:: Structure of a text library. +* The txtlib program:: +@end menu + +@c -------------------------------------------------------------------------- +@node Copying, Introduction, Top, Top +@unnumbered The GNU General Public License + +@include gpl.texi + +@c -------------------------------------------------------------------------- +@node Introduction, The file repository, Copying, Top +@unnumbered Introduction + + +When you have a number of development trees, managing files which are common +to all of them starts to become a real pain. When a new version of some file +comes out, checking out all your source directories, replacing the old +version with the new one, and committing all the changes back gets to be +very tiresome rather quickly. + +The Common File Distribution attempts to be a solution to some of the +problems caused sharing files between source trees. It provides a single +repository for shared files, and lets you create links to the shared copies +from your source trees. It also provides a simple method for constructing +text files from small bits of `text libraries'. + +The whole lot is held together by a collection of small shell scripts. They +can easily be modified to suit the requirements of an individual site, or +used as the basis of other similar scripts. + + +@c -------------------------------------------------------------------------- +@node The file repository, Text libraries, Introduction, Top +@chapter The file repository + + +When the Common File Distribution is installed, it creates a repository where +shared files can be placed, and it places a few standard GNU files there. By +default, the repository is @file{@var{prefix}/share/common}, although this +can be set using the @code{--datadir} option to the configuration script. + +You can place your own files in the repository if you like. If you do, +they'll be treated in exactly the same way as ones in the distribution. + +The command @code{mklinks} reads a list of filenames and creates symbolic +links to the corresponding names in the repository. This ensures that when a +file in the repository gets updated, any source trees automatically use the +new version. Obviously, when you build a source distribution, you must +ensure that links are followed, rather than saved as links; the @code{h} +option to @code{tar} does this (this is the default in Automake; @pxref{Top, +, Overview, automake, GNU Automake}). + +The command @code{findlinks} scans the current directory (and its +subdirectories) for files whose names match those in the repository. + +@menu +* The mklinks command:: +* The findlinks command:: +@end menu + + + +@node The mklinks command, The findlinks command, The file repository, The file repository +@section The @code{mklinks} command + +Links into the file repository are made with the @code{mklinks} command: + +@example +mklinks [@var{file}]... +@end example + +If you don't specify any @code{file}s, it reads @file{.links} from the +current directory; you can pass @samp{-} to read standard input. The program +expects the files to contain a list of filenames; for each name read, it +creates a symbolic link to the appropriate file in the repository. + +You can create a list of files which probably need linking using the +@code{findlinks} command. @xref{The findlinks command}. + + + +@node The findlinks command, , The mklinks command, The file repository +@section The @code{findlinks} command + +The @code{findlinks} searches the current directory and any subdirectories +and writes to standard output a list of files whose names match files in the +file repository. It takes no arguments, although typically output will be +redirected to the file @file{.links}, which the @code{mklinks} command reads +by default: + +@example +findlinks >.links +@end example + + +@c -------------------------------------------------------------------------- +@node Text libraries, , The file repository, Top +@chapter Text libraries + + +Just being able to share files isn't always good enough: it's sometimes +useful to able to share small parts of files. The Common Files Distribution +comes with a simple system for extracting requested parts from a @dfn{text +library}. + + +@menu +* Anatomy:: Structure of a text library. +* The txtlib program:: +@end menu + + + +@node Anatomy, The txtlib program, Text libraries, Text libraries +@section Anatomy of a library file + +Text libraries contain a @dfn{header} followed by a number of @dfn{chunks}. +The start of a chunk is marked by a line containing a string of the form +@samp{*@@-@var{name}-@@*}; the chunk continues until the start of the next +chunk, or the end of the file. The header is simply the text preceding the +first chunk. + +Here's a simple example of a text library. + +@example +% -*-tex-*- +% +% Collection of useful macros +% + +% *@@-todo-@@* + +\newcommand\todo[1]@{% + \par% + \dimen@@\linewidth% + \advance\dimen@@-\tw@@\fboxsep% + \advance\dimen@@-\tw@@\fboxrule% + \fbox@{\expandafter\parbox\expandafter@{\the\dimen@@@}@{% + \begin@{note@}[To do:]% + #1% + \end@{note@}% + @}@}% + \par% +@} + +% *@@-indexing-@@* + +\newindex@{default@}@{idx@}@{ind@}@{Index@} +\atdef^@{\index@} +\atdef_@{\index*@} +@end example + +The file contains a short header containing a line to tell Emacs what mode +to use when editing it and a brief description of the file. It contains two +chunks, named @code{todo} and @code{indexing} + + +@node The txtlib program, , Anatomy, Text libraries +@section The @code{txtlib} program + +The @code{txtlib} program can be used to perform some simple operations on +text libraries: + +@example +txtlib [-x] [-o @var{file}] @var{library}... +txtlib -l @var{library}... +@end example + +By default, or if the @code{-x} option is given, @code{txtlib} extracts +chunks from libraries. It reads a list of chunk names from standard input, +one per line. It then examines each @var{library} named on the command line, +and extracts the requested chunks, writing them to standard output, or to a +named file. Note that the chunks are extracted in the order they appear in +the libraries, not the order in which their chunk names were listed. + +If the @code{-l} option is given, @code{txtlib} scans each @var{library} in +turn, writing the names of all the chunks it finds to standard output. + + + + +@c -------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +@contents +@bye diff --git a/config.guess b/config.guess new file mode 100755 index 0000000..ea44a2a --- /dev/null +++ b/config.guess @@ -0,0 +1,740 @@ +#! /bin/sh +# Attempt to guess a canonical system name. +# Copyright (C) 1992, 93, 94, 95, 96, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# +# This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it +# under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +# (at your option) any later version. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +# WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU +# General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. +# +# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you +# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a +# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under +# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program. + +# Written by Per Bothner . +# The master version of this file is at the FSF in /home/gd/gnu/lib. +# +# This script attempts to guess a canonical system name similar to +# config.sub. If it succeeds, it prints the system name on stdout, and +# exits with 0. Otherwise, it exits with 1. +# +# The plan is that this can be called by configure scripts if you +# don't specify an explicit system type (host/target name). +# +# Only a few systems have been added to this list; please add others +# (but try to keep the structure clean). +# + +# This is needed to find uname on a Pyramid OSx when run in the BSD universe. +# (ghazi@noc.rutgers.edu 8/24/94.) +if (test -f /.attbin/uname) >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then + PATH=$PATH:/.attbin ; export PATH +fi + +UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -m) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_MACHINE=unknown +UNAME_RELEASE=`(uname -r) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_RELEASE=unknown +UNAME_SYSTEM=`(uname -s) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_SYSTEM=unknown +UNAME_VERSION=`(uname -v) 2>/dev/null` || UNAME_VERSION=unknown + +trap 'rm -f dummy.c dummy.o dummy; exit 1' 1 2 15 + +# Note: order is significant - the case branches are not exclusive. + +case "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" in + alpha:OSF1:*:*) + # A Vn.n version is a released version. + # A Tn.n version is a released field test version. + # A Xn.n version is an unreleased experimental baselevel. + # 1.2 uses "1.2" for uname -r. + echo alpha-dec-osf`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/^[VTX]//'` + exit 0 ;; + 21064:Windows_NT:50:3) + echo alpha-dec-winnt3.5 + exit 0 ;; + Amiga*:UNIX_System_V:4.0:*) + echo m68k-cbm-sysv4 + exit 0;; + amiga:NetBSD:*:*) + echo m68k-cbm-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + amiga:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + arc64:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo mips64el-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + arc:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + hkmips:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo mips-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + pmax:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + sgi:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo mips-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + wgrisc:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo mipsel-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + arm:RISC*:1.[012]*:*|arm:riscix:1.[012]*:*) + echo arm-acorn-riscix${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0;; + SR2?01:HI-UX/MPP:*:*) + echo hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxmpp + exit 0;; + Pyramid*:OSx*:*:*|MIS*:OSx*:*:*) + # akee@wpdis03.wpafb.af.mil (Earle F. Ake) contributed MIS and NILE. + if test "`(/bin/universe) 2>/dev/null`" = att ; then + echo pyramid-pyramid-sysv3 + else + echo pyramid-pyramid-bsd + fi + exit 0 ;; + NILE:*:*:dcosx) + echo pyramid-pyramid-svr4 + exit 0 ;; + sun4*:SunOS:5.*:* | tadpole*:SunOS:5.*:*) + echo sparc-sun-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'` + exit 0 ;; + i86pc:SunOS:5.*:*) + echo i386-pc-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'` + exit 0 ;; + sun4*:SunOS:6*:*) + # According to config.sub, this is the proper way to canonicalize + # SunOS6. Hard to guess exactly what SunOS6 will be like, but + # it's likely to be more like Solaris than SunOS4. + echo sparc-sun-solaris3`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'` + exit 0 ;; + sun4*:SunOS:*:*) + case "`/usr/bin/arch -k`" in + Series*|S4*) + UNAME_RELEASE=`uname -v` + ;; + esac + # Japanese Language versions have a version number like `4.1.3-JL'. + echo sparc-sun-sunos`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/'` + exit 0 ;; + sun3*:SunOS:*:*) + echo m68k-sun-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + aushp:SunOS:*:*) + echo sparc-auspex-sunos${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + atari*:NetBSD:*:*) + echo m68k-atari-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + atari*:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + sun3*:NetBSD:*:*) + echo m68k-sun-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + sun3*:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + mac68k:NetBSD:*:*) + echo m68k-apple-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + mac68k:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + mvme68k:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + mvme88k:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo m88k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + powerpc:machten:*:*) + echo powerpc-apple-machten${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + RISC*:Mach:*:*) + echo mips-dec-mach_bsd4.3 + exit 0 ;; + RISC*:ULTRIX:*:*) + echo mips-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + VAX*:ULTRIX*:*:*) + echo vax-dec-ultrix${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + 2020:CLIX:*:*) + echo clipper-intergraph-clix${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + mips:*:*:UMIPS | mips:*:*:RISCos) + sed 's/^ //' << EOF >dummy.c + int main (argc, argv) int argc; char **argv; { + #if defined (host_mips) && defined (MIPSEB) + #if defined (SYSTYPE_SYSV) + printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssysv\n", argv[1]); exit (0); + #endif + #if defined (SYSTYPE_SVR4) + printf ("mips-mips-riscos%ssvr4\n", argv[1]); exit (0); + #endif + #if defined (SYSTYPE_BSD43) || defined(SYSTYPE_BSD) + printf ("mips-mips-riscos%sbsd\n", argv[1]); exit (0); + #endif + #endif + exit (-1); + } +EOF + ${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy \ + && ./dummy `echo "${UNAME_RELEASE}" | sed -n 's/\([0-9]*\).*/\1/p'` \ + && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0 + rm -f dummy.c dummy + echo mips-mips-riscos${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + Night_Hawk:Power_UNIX:*:*) + echo powerpc-harris-powerunix + exit 0 ;; + m88k:CX/UX:7*:*) + echo m88k-harris-cxux7 + exit 0 ;; + m88k:*:4*:R4*) + echo m88k-motorola-sysv4 + exit 0 ;; + m88k:*:3*:R3*) + echo m88k-motorola-sysv3 + exit 0 ;; + AViiON:dgux:*:*) + # DG/UX returns AViiON for all architectures + UNAME_PROCESSOR=`/usr/bin/uname -p` + if [ $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88100 -o $UNAME_PROCESSOR = mc88110 ] ; then + if [ ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = m88kdguxelfx \ + -o ${TARGET_BINARY_INTERFACE}x = x ] ; then + echo m88k-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE} + else + echo m88k-dg-dguxbcs${UNAME_RELEASE} + fi + else echo i586-dg-dgux${UNAME_RELEASE} + fi + exit 0 ;; + M88*:DolphinOS:*:*) # DolphinOS (SVR3) + echo m88k-dolphin-sysv3 + exit 0 ;; + M88*:*:R3*:*) + # Delta 88k system running SVR3 + echo m88k-motorola-sysv3 + exit 0 ;; + XD88*:*:*:*) # Tektronix XD88 system running UTekV (SVR3) + echo m88k-tektronix-sysv3 + exit 0 ;; + Tek43[0-9][0-9]:UTek:*:*) # Tektronix 4300 system running UTek (BSD) + echo m68k-tektronix-bsd + exit 0 ;; + *:IRIX*:*:*) + echo mips-sgi-irix`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/-/_/g'` + exit 0 ;; + ????????:AIX?:[12].1:2) # AIX 2.2.1 or AIX 2.1.1 is RT/PC AIX. + echo romp-ibm-aix # uname -m gives an 8 hex-code CPU id + exit 0 ;; # Note that: echo "'`uname -s`'" gives 'AIX ' + i?86:AIX:*:*) + echo i386-ibm-aix + exit 0 ;; + *:AIX:2:3) + if grep bos325 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then + sed 's/^ //' << EOF >dummy.c + #include + + main() + { + if (!__power_pc()) + exit(1); + puts("powerpc-ibm-aix3.2.5"); + exit(0); + } +EOF + ${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy && ./dummy && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0 + rm -f dummy.c dummy + echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.5 + elif grep bos324 /usr/include/stdio.h >/dev/null 2>&1; then + echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2.4 + else + echo rs6000-ibm-aix3.2 + fi + exit 0 ;; + *:AIX:*:4) + if /usr/sbin/lsattr -EHl proc0 | grep POWER >/dev/null 2>&1; then + IBM_ARCH=rs6000 + else + IBM_ARCH=powerpc + fi + if [ -x /usr/bin/oslevel ] ; then + IBM_REV=`/usr/bin/oslevel` + else + IBM_REV=4.${UNAME_RELEASE} + fi + echo ${IBM_ARCH}-ibm-aix${IBM_REV} + exit 0 ;; + *:AIX:*:*) + echo rs6000-ibm-aix + exit 0 ;; + ibmrt:4.4BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*) + echo romp-ibm-bsd4.4 + exit 0 ;; + ibmrt:*BSD:*|romp-ibm:BSD:*) # covers RT/PC NetBSD and + echo romp-ibm-bsd${UNAME_RELEASE} # 4.3 with uname added to + exit 0 ;; # report: romp-ibm BSD 4.3 + *:BOSX:*:*) + echo rs6000-bull-bosx + exit 0 ;; + DPX/2?00:B.O.S.:*:*) + echo m68k-bull-sysv3 + exit 0 ;; + 9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:1.*:*) + echo m68k-hp-bsd + exit 0 ;; + hp300:4.4BSD:*:* | 9000/[34]??:4.3bsd:2.*:*) + echo m68k-hp-bsd4.4 + exit 0 ;; + 9000/[3478]??:HP-UX:*:*) + case "${UNAME_MACHINE}" in + 9000/31? ) HP_ARCH=m68000 ;; + 9000/[34]?? ) HP_ARCH=m68k ;; + 9000/7?? | 9000/8?[1679] ) HP_ARCH=hppa1.1 ;; + 9000/8?? ) HP_ARCH=hppa1.0 ;; + esac + HPUX_REV=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*.[0B]*//'` + echo ${HP_ARCH}-hp-hpux${HPUX_REV} + exit 0 ;; + 3050*:HI-UX:*:*) + sed 's/^ //' << EOF >dummy.c + #include + int + main () + { + long cpu = sysconf (_SC_CPU_VERSION); + /* The order matters, because CPU_IS_HP_MC68K erroneously returns + true for CPU_PA_RISC1_0. CPU_IS_PA_RISC returns correct + results, however. */ + if (CPU_IS_PA_RISC (cpu)) + { + switch (cpu) + { + case CPU_PA_RISC1_0: puts ("hppa1.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break; + case CPU_PA_RISC1_1: puts ("hppa1.1-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break; + case CPU_PA_RISC2_0: puts ("hppa2.0-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break; + default: puts ("hppa-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); break; + } + } + else if (CPU_IS_HP_MC68K (cpu)) + puts ("m68k-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); + else puts ("unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2"); + exit (0); + } +EOF + ${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy && ./dummy && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0 + rm -f dummy.c dummy + echo unknown-hitachi-hiuxwe2 + exit 0 ;; + 9000/7??:4.3bsd:*:* | 9000/8?[79]:4.3bsd:*:* ) + echo hppa1.1-hp-bsd + exit 0 ;; + 9000/8??:4.3bsd:*:*) + echo hppa1.0-hp-bsd + exit 0 ;; + hp7??:OSF1:*:* | hp8?[79]:OSF1:*:* ) + echo hppa1.1-hp-osf + exit 0 ;; + hp8??:OSF1:*:*) + echo hppa1.0-hp-osf + exit 0 ;; + i?86:OSF1:*:*) + if [ -x /usr/sbin/sysversion ] ; then + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1mk + else + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-osf1 + fi + exit 0 ;; + parisc*:Lites*:*:*) + echo hppa1.1-hp-lites + exit 0 ;; + C1*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C1*:*) + echo c1-convex-bsd + exit 0 ;; + C2*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C2*:*) + if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc + then echo c32-convex-bsd + else echo c2-convex-bsd + fi + exit 0 ;; + C34*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C34*:*) + echo c34-convex-bsd + exit 0 ;; + C38*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C38*:*) + echo c38-convex-bsd + exit 0 ;; + C4*:ConvexOS:*:* | convex:ConvexOS:C4*:*) + echo c4-convex-bsd + exit 0 ;; + CRAY*X-MP:*:*:*) + echo xmp-cray-unicos + exit 0 ;; + CRAY*Y-MP:*:*:*) + echo ymp-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + CRAY*[A-Z]90:*:*:*) + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} \ + | sed -e 's/CRAY.*\([A-Z]90\)/\1/' \ + -e y/ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ/abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz/ + exit 0 ;; + CRAY*TS:*:*:*) + echo t90-cray-unicos${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + CRAY-2:*:*:*) + echo cray2-cray-unicos + exit 0 ;; + F300:UNIX_System_V:*:*) + FUJITSU_SYS=`uname -p | tr [A-Z] [a-z] | sed -e 's/\///'` + FUJITSU_REL=`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE} | sed -e 's/ /_/'` + echo "f300-fujitsu-${FUJITSU_SYS}${FUJITSU_REL}" + exit 0 ;; + F301:UNIX_System_V:*:*) + echo f301-fujitsu-uxpv`echo $UNAME_RELEASE | sed 's/ .*//'` + exit 0 ;; + hp3[0-9][05]:NetBSD:*:*) + echo m68k-hp-netbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + hp300:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo m68k-unknown-openbsd${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + i?86:BSD/386:*:* | *:BSD/OS:*:*) + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-bsdi${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + *:FreeBSD:*:*) + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-freebsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-(].*//'` + exit 0 ;; + *:NetBSD:*:*) + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-netbsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-_].*/\./'` + exit 0 ;; + *:OpenBSD:*:*) + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-openbsd`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[-_].*/\./'` + exit 0 ;; + i*:CYGWIN*:*) + echo i386-pc-cygwin32 + exit 0 ;; + p*:CYGWIN*:*) + echo powerpcle-unknown-cygwin32 + exit 0 ;; + prep*:SunOS:5.*:*) + echo powerpcle-unknown-solaris2`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's/[^.]*//'` + exit 0 ;; + *:GNU:*:*) + echo `echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}|sed -e 's,[-/].*$,,'`-unknown-gnu`echo ${UNAME_RELEASE}|sed -e 's,/.*$,,'` + exit 0 ;; + *:Linux:*:*) + # The BFD linker knows what the default object file format is, so + # first see if it will tell us. + ld_help_string=`ld --help 2>&1` + if echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: elf_i.86"; then + echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnu" ; exit 0 + elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: i.86linux"; then + echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuaout" ; exit 0 + elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: i.86coff"; then + echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnucoff" ; exit 0 + elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: m68kelf"; then + echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnu" ; exit 0 + elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: m68klinux"; then + echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-unknown-linux-gnuaout" ; exit 0 + elif echo "$ld_help_string" | grep >/dev/null 2>&1 "supported emulations: elf32ppc"; then + echo "powerpc-unknown-linux-gnu" ; exit 0 + elif test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "alpha" ; then + echo alpha-unknown-linux-gnu ; exit 0 + elif test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "sparc" ; then + echo sparc-unknown-linux-gnu ; exit 0 + elif test "${UNAME_MACHINE}" = "mips" ; then + cat >dummy.c </dev/null && ./dummy "${UNAME_MACHINE}" && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0 + rm -f dummy.c dummy + else + # Either a pre-BFD a.out linker (linux-gnuoldld) or one that does not give us + # useful --help. Gcc wants to distinguish between linux-gnuoldld and linux-gnuaout. + test ! -d /usr/lib/ldscripts/. \ + && echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-linux-gnuoldld" && exit 0 + # Determine whether the default compiler is a.out or elf + cat >dummy.c </dev/null && ./dummy "${UNAME_MACHINE}" && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0 + rm -f dummy.c dummy + fi ;; +# ptx 4.0 does uname -s correctly, with DYNIX/ptx in there. earlier versions +# are messed up and put the nodename in both sysname and nodename. + i?86:DYNIX/ptx:4*:*) + echo i386-sequent-sysv4 + exit 0 ;; + i?86:*:4.*:* | i?86:SYSTEM_V:4.*:*) + if grep Novell /usr/include/link.h >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-univel-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} + else + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} + fi + exit 0 ;; + i?86:*:3.2:*) + if test -f /usr/options/cb.name; then + UNAME_REL=`sed -n 's/.*Version //p' /dev/null >/dev/null ; then + UNAME_REL=`(/bin/uname -X|egrep Release|sed -e 's/.*= //')` + (/bin/uname -X|egrep i80486 >/dev/null) && UNAME_MACHINE=i486 + (/bin/uname -X|egrep '^Machine.*Pentium' >/dev/null) \ + && UNAME_MACHINE=i586 + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sco$UNAME_REL + else + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-pc-sysv32 + fi + exit 0 ;; + Intel:Mach:3*:*) + echo i386-pc-mach3 + exit 0 ;; + paragon:*:*:*) + echo i860-intel-osf1 + exit 0 ;; + i860:*:4.*:*) # i860-SVR4 + if grep Stardent /usr/include/sys/uadmin.h >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then + echo i860-stardent-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} # Stardent Vistra i860-SVR4 + else # Add other i860-SVR4 vendors below as they are discovered. + echo i860-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} # Unknown i860-SVR4 + fi + exit 0 ;; + mini*:CTIX:SYS*5:*) + # "miniframe" + echo m68010-convergent-sysv + exit 0 ;; + M68*:*:R3V[567]*:*) + test -r /sysV68 && echo 'm68k-motorola-sysv' && exit 0 ;; + 3[34]??:*:4.0:3.0 | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:3.0 | 4850:*:4.0:3.0) + OS_REL='' + test -r /etc/.relid \ + && OS_REL=.`sed -n 's/[^ ]* [^ ]* \([0-9][0-9]\).*/\1/p' < /etc/.relid` + /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \ + && echo i486-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0 + /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | /bin/grep entium >/dev/null \ + && echo i586-ncr-sysv4.3${OS_REL} && exit 0 ;; + 3[34]??:*:4.0:* | 3[34]??,*:*:4.0:*) + /bin/uname -p 2>/dev/null | grep 86 >/dev/null \ + && echo i486-ncr-sysv4 && exit 0 ;; + m68*:LynxOS:2.*:*) + echo m68k-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + mc68030:UNIX_System_V:4.*:*) + echo m68k-atari-sysv4 + exit 0 ;; + i?86:LynxOS:2.*:*) + echo i386-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + TSUNAMI:LynxOS:2.*:*) + echo sparc-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + rs6000:LynxOS:2.*:* | PowerPC:LynxOS:2.*:*) + echo rs6000-unknown-lynxos${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + SM[BE]S:UNIX_SV:*:*) + echo mips-dde-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + RM*:SINIX-*:*:*) + echo mips-sni-sysv4 + exit 0 ;; + *:SINIX-*:*:*) + if uname -p 2>/dev/null >/dev/null ; then + UNAME_MACHINE=`(uname -p) 2>/dev/null` + echo ${UNAME_MACHINE}-sni-sysv4 + else + echo ns32k-sni-sysv + fi + exit 0 ;; + PENTIUM:CPunix:4.0*:*) # Unisys `ClearPath HMP IX 4000' SVR4/MP effort + # says + echo i586-unisys-sysv4 + exit 0 ;; + *:UNIX_System_V:4*:FTX*) + # From Gerald Hewes . + # How about differentiating between stratus architectures? -djm + echo hppa1.1-stratus-sysv4 + exit 0 ;; + *:*:*:FTX*) + # From seanf@swdc.stratus.com. + echo i860-stratus-sysv4 + exit 0 ;; + mc68*:A/UX:*:*) + echo m68k-apple-aux${UNAME_RELEASE} + exit 0 ;; + R3000:*System_V*:*:* | R4000:UNIX_SYSV:*:*) + if [ -d /usr/nec ]; then + echo mips-nec-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} + else + echo mips-unknown-sysv${UNAME_RELEASE} + fi + exit 0 ;; +esac + +#echo '(No uname command or uname output not recognized.)' 1>&2 +#echo "${UNAME_MACHINE}:${UNAME_SYSTEM}:${UNAME_RELEASE}:${UNAME_VERSION}" 1>&2 + +cat >dummy.c < +# include +#endif +main () +{ +#if defined (sony) +#if defined (MIPSEB) + /* BFD wants "bsd" instead of "newsos". Perhaps BFD should be changed, + I don't know.... */ + printf ("mips-sony-bsd\n"); exit (0); +#else +#include + printf ("m68k-sony-newsos%s\n", +#ifdef NEWSOS4 + "4" +#else + "" +#endif + ); exit (0); +#endif +#endif + +#if defined (__arm) && defined (__acorn) && defined (__unix) + printf ("arm-acorn-riscix"); exit (0); +#endif + +#if defined (hp300) && !defined (hpux) + printf ("m68k-hp-bsd\n"); exit (0); +#endif + +#if defined (NeXT) +#if !defined (__ARCHITECTURE__) +#define __ARCHITECTURE__ "m68k" +#endif + int version; + version=`(hostinfo | sed -n 's/.*NeXT Mach \([0-9]*\).*/\1/p') 2>/dev/null`; + printf ("%s-next-nextstep%d\n", __ARCHITECTURE__, version); + exit (0); +#endif + +#if defined (MULTIMAX) || defined (n16) +#if defined (UMAXV) + printf ("ns32k-encore-sysv\n"); exit (0); +#else +#if defined (CMU) + printf ("ns32k-encore-mach\n"); exit (0); +#else + printf ("ns32k-encore-bsd\n"); exit (0); +#endif +#endif +#endif + +#if defined (__386BSD__) + printf ("i386-pc-bsd\n"); exit (0); +#endif + +#if defined (sequent) +#if defined (i386) + printf ("i386-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0); +#endif +#if defined (ns32000) + printf ("ns32k-sequent-dynix\n"); exit (0); +#endif +#endif + +#if defined (_SEQUENT_) + struct utsname un; + + uname(&un); + + if (strncmp(un.version, "V2", 2) == 0) { + printf ("i386-sequent-ptx2\n"); exit (0); + } + if (strncmp(un.version, "V1", 2) == 0) { /* XXX is V1 correct? */ + printf ("i386-sequent-ptx1\n"); exit (0); + } + printf ("i386-sequent-ptx\n"); exit (0); + +#endif + +#if defined (vax) +#if !defined (ultrix) + printf ("vax-dec-bsd\n"); exit (0); +#else + printf ("vax-dec-ultrix\n"); exit (0); +#endif +#endif + +#if defined (alliant) && defined (i860) + printf ("i860-alliant-bsd\n"); exit (0); +#endif + + exit (1); +} +EOF + +${CC-cc} dummy.c -o dummy 2>/dev/null && ./dummy && rm dummy.c dummy && exit 0 +rm -f dummy.c dummy + +# Apollos put the system type in the environment. + +test -d /usr/apollo && { echo ${ISP}-apollo-${SYSTYPE}; exit 0; } + +# Convex versions that predate uname can use getsysinfo(1) + +if [ -x /usr/convex/getsysinfo ] +then + case `getsysinfo -f cpu_type` in + c1*) + echo c1-convex-bsd + exit 0 ;; + c2*) + if getsysinfo -f scalar_acc + then echo c32-convex-bsd + else echo c2-convex-bsd + fi + exit 0 ;; + c34*) + echo c34-convex-bsd + exit 0 ;; + c38*) + echo c38-convex-bsd + exit 0 ;; + c4*) + echo c4-convex-bsd + exit 0 ;; + esac +fi + +#echo '(Unable to guess system type)' 1>&2 + +exit 1 diff --git a/config.sub b/config.sub new file mode 100755 index 0000000..0131946 --- /dev/null +++ b/config.sub @@ -0,0 +1,939 @@ +#! /bin/sh +# Configuration validation subroutine script, version 1.1. +# Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# This file is (in principle) common to ALL GNU software. +# The presence of a machine in this file suggests that SOME GNU software +# can handle that machine. It does not imply ALL GNU software can. +# +# This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +# (at your option) any later version. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, +# Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you +# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a +# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under +# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program. + +# Configuration subroutine to validate and canonicalize a configuration type. +# Supply the specified configuration type as an argument. +# If it is invalid, we print an error message on stderr and exit with code 1. +# Otherwise, we print the canonical config type on stdout and succeed. + +# This file is supposed to be the same for all GNU packages +# and recognize all the CPU types, system types and aliases +# that are meaningful with *any* GNU software. +# Each package is responsible for reporting which valid configurations +# it does not support. The user should be able to distinguish +# a failure to support a valid configuration from a meaningless +# configuration. + +# The goal of this file is to map all the various variations of a given +# machine specification into a single specification in the form: +# CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-OPERATING_SYSTEM +# or in some cases, the newer four-part form: +# CPU_TYPE-MANUFACTURER-KERNEL-OPERATING_SYSTEM +# It is wrong to echo any other type of specification. + +if [ x$1 = x ] +then + echo Configuration name missing. 1>&2 + echo "Usage: $0 CPU-MFR-OPSYS" 1>&2 + echo "or $0 ALIAS" 1>&2 + echo where ALIAS is a recognized configuration type. 1>&2 + exit 1 +fi + +# First pass through any local machine types. +case $1 in + *local*) + echo $1 + exit 0 + ;; + *) + ;; +esac + +# Separate what the user gave into CPU-COMPANY and OS or KERNEL-OS (if any). +# Here we must recognize all the valid KERNEL-OS combinations. +maybe_os=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\2/'` +case $maybe_os in + linux-gnu*) + os=-$maybe_os + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/^\(.*\)-\([^-]*-[^-]*\)$/\1/'` + ;; + *) + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed 's/-[^-]*$//'` + if [ $basic_machine != $1 ] + then os=`echo $1 | sed 's/.*-/-/'` + else os=; fi + ;; +esac + +### Let's recognize common machines as not being operating systems so +### that things like config.sub decstation-3100 work. We also +### recognize some manufacturers as not being operating systems, so we +### can provide default operating systems below. +case $os in + -sun*os*) + # Prevent following clause from handling this invalid input. + ;; + -dec* | -mips* | -sequent* | -encore* | -pc532* | -sgi* | -sony* | \ + -att* | -7300* | -3300* | -delta* | -motorola* | -sun[234]* | \ + -unicom* | -ibm* | -next | -hp | -isi* | -apollo | -altos* | \ + -convergent* | -ncr* | -news | -32* | -3600* | -3100* | -hitachi* |\ + -c[123]* | -convex* | -sun | -crds | -omron* | -dg | -ultra | -tti* | \ + -harris | -dolphin | -highlevel | -gould | -cbm | -ns | -masscomp | \ + -apple) + os= + basic_machine=$1 + ;; + -hiux*) + os=-hiuxwe2 + ;; + -sco5) + os=sco3.2v5 + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` + ;; + -sco4) + os=-sco3.2v4 + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` + ;; + -sco3.2.[4-9]*) + os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/sco3.2./sco3.2v/'` + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` + ;; + -sco3.2v[4-9]*) + # Don't forget version if it is 3.2v4 or newer. + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` + ;; + -sco*) + os=-sco3.2v2 + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` + ;; + -isc) + os=-isc2.2 + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` + ;; + -clix*) + basic_machine=clipper-intergraph + ;; + -isc*) + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-pc/'` + ;; + -lynx*) + os=-lynxos + ;; + -ptx*) + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86-.*/86-sequent/'` + ;; + -windowsnt*) + os=`echo $os | sed -e 's/windowsnt/winnt/'` + ;; + -psos*) + os=-psos + ;; +esac + +# Decode aliases for certain CPU-COMPANY combinations. +case $basic_machine in + # Recognize the basic CPU types without company name. + # Some are omitted here because they have special meanings below. + tahoe | i860 | m32r | m68k | m68000 | m88k | ns32k | arm \ + | arme[lb] | pyramid | mn10300 \ + | tron | a29k | 580 | i960 | h8300 | hppa | hppa1.0 | hppa1.1 \ + | alpha | we32k | ns16k | clipper | i370 | sh \ + | powerpc | powerpcle | 1750a | dsp16xx | mips64 | mipsel \ + | pdp11 | mips64el | mips64orion | mips64orionel \ + | sparc | sparclet | sparclite | sparc64) + basic_machine=$basic_machine-unknown + ;; + # We use `pc' rather than `unknown' + # because (1) that's what they normally are, and + # (2) the word "unknown" tends to confuse beginning users. + i[3456]86) + basic_machine=$basic_machine-pc + ;; + # Object if more than one company name word. + *-*-*) + echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2 + exit 1 + ;; + # Recognize the basic CPU types with company name. + vax-* | tahoe-* | i[3456]86-* | i860-* | m32r-* | m68k-* | m68000-* \ + | m88k-* | sparc-* | ns32k-* | fx80-* | arm-* | c[123]* \ + | mips-* | pyramid-* | tron-* | a29k-* | romp-* | rs6000-* | power-* \ + | none-* | 580-* | cray2-* | h8300-* | i960-* | xmp-* | ymp-* \ + | hppa-* | hppa1.0-* | hppa1.1-* | alpha-* | we32k-* | cydra-* | ns16k-* \ + | pn-* | np1-* | xps100-* | clipper-* | orion-* | sparclite-* \ + | pdp11-* | sh-* | powerpc-* | powerpcle-* | sparc64-* | mips64-* | mipsel-* \ + | mips64el-* | mips64orion-* | mips64orionel-* | f301-*) + ;; + # Recognize the various machine names and aliases which stand + # for a CPU type and a company and sometimes even an OS. + 3b1 | 7300 | 7300-att | att-7300 | pc7300 | safari | unixpc) + basic_machine=m68000-att + ;; + 3b*) + basic_machine=we32k-att + ;; + alliant | fx80) + basic_machine=fx80-alliant + ;; + altos | altos3068) + basic_machine=m68k-altos + ;; + am29k) + basic_machine=a29k-none + os=-bsd + ;; + amdahl) + basic_machine=580-amdahl + os=-sysv + ;; + amiga | amiga-*) + basic_machine=m68k-cbm + ;; + amigados) + basic_machine=m68k-cbm + os=-amigados + ;; + amigaunix | amix) + basic_machine=m68k-cbm + os=-sysv4 + ;; + apollo68) + basic_machine=m68k-apollo + os=-sysv + ;; + aux) + basic_machine=m68k-apple + os=-aux + ;; + balance) + basic_machine=ns32k-sequent + os=-dynix + ;; + convex-c1) + basic_machine=c1-convex + os=-bsd + ;; + convex-c2) + basic_machine=c2-convex + os=-bsd + ;; + convex-c32) + basic_machine=c32-convex + os=-bsd + ;; + convex-c34) + basic_machine=c34-convex + os=-bsd + ;; + convex-c38) + basic_machine=c38-convex + os=-bsd + ;; + cray | ymp) + basic_machine=ymp-cray + os=-unicos + ;; + cray2) + basic_machine=cray2-cray + os=-unicos + ;; + [ctj]90-cray) + basic_machine=c90-cray + os=-unicos + ;; + crds | unos) + basic_machine=m68k-crds + ;; + da30 | da30-*) + basic_machine=m68k-da30 + ;; + decstation | decstation-3100 | pmax | pmax-* | pmin | dec3100 | decstatn) + basic_machine=mips-dec + ;; + delta | 3300 | motorola-3300 | motorola-delta \ + | 3300-motorola | delta-motorola) + basic_machine=m68k-motorola + ;; + delta88) + basic_machine=m88k-motorola + os=-sysv3 + ;; + dpx20 | dpx20-*) + basic_machine=rs6000-bull + os=-bosx + ;; + dpx2* | dpx2*-bull) + basic_machine=m68k-bull + os=-sysv3 + ;; + ebmon29k) + basic_machine=a29k-amd + os=-ebmon + ;; + elxsi) + basic_machine=elxsi-elxsi + os=-bsd + ;; + encore | umax | mmax) + basic_machine=ns32k-encore + ;; + fx2800) + basic_machine=i860-alliant + ;; + genix) + basic_machine=ns32k-ns + ;; + gmicro) + basic_machine=tron-gmicro + os=-sysv + ;; + h3050r* | hiux*) + basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi + os=-hiuxwe2 + ;; + h8300hms) + basic_machine=h8300-hitachi + os=-hms + ;; + harris) + basic_machine=m88k-harris + os=-sysv3 + ;; + hp300-*) + basic_machine=m68k-hp + ;; + hp300bsd) + basic_machine=m68k-hp + os=-bsd + ;; + hp300hpux) + basic_machine=m68k-hp + os=-hpux + ;; + hp9k2[0-9][0-9] | hp9k31[0-9]) + basic_machine=m68000-hp + ;; + hp9k3[2-9][0-9]) + basic_machine=m68k-hp + ;; + hp9k7[0-9][0-9] | hp7[0-9][0-9] | hp9k8[0-9]7 | hp8[0-9]7) + basic_machine=hppa1.1-hp + ;; + hp9k8[0-9][0-9] | hp8[0-9][0-9]) + basic_machine=hppa1.0-hp + ;; + hppa-next) + os=-nextstep3 + ;; + i370-ibm* | ibm*) + basic_machine=i370-ibm + os=-mvs + ;; +# I'm not sure what "Sysv32" means. Should this be sysv3.2? + i[3456]86v32) + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'` + os=-sysv32 + ;; + i[3456]86v4*) + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'` + os=-sysv4 + ;; + i[3456]86v) + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'` + os=-sysv + ;; + i[3456]86sol2) + basic_machine=`echo $1 | sed -e 's/86.*/86-pc/'` + os=-solaris2 + ;; + iris | iris4d) + basic_machine=mips-sgi + case $os in + -irix*) + ;; + *) + os=-irix4 + ;; + esac + ;; + isi68 | isi) + basic_machine=m68k-isi + os=-sysv + ;; + m88k-omron*) + basic_machine=m88k-omron + ;; + magnum | m3230) + basic_machine=mips-mips + os=-sysv + ;; + merlin) + basic_machine=ns32k-utek + os=-sysv + ;; + miniframe) + basic_machine=m68000-convergent + ;; + mipsel*-linux*) + basic_machine=mipsel-unknown + os=-linux + ;; + mips*-linux*) + basic_machine=mips-unknown + os=-linux + ;; + mips3*-*) + basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'` + ;; + mips3*) + basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed -e 's/mips3/mips64/'`-unknown + ;; + ncr3000) + basic_machine=i486-ncr + os=-sysv4 + ;; + news | news700 | news800 | news900) + basic_machine=m68k-sony + os=-newsos + ;; + news1000) + basic_machine=m68030-sony + os=-newsos + ;; + news-3600 | risc-news) + basic_machine=mips-sony + os=-newsos + ;; + next | m*-next ) + basic_machine=m68k-next + case $os in + -nextstep* ) + ;; + -ns2*) + os=-nextstep2 + ;; + *) + os=-nextstep3 + ;; + esac + ;; + nh3000) + basic_machine=m68k-harris + os=-cxux + ;; + nh[45]000) + basic_machine=m88k-harris + os=-cxux + ;; + nindy960) + basic_machine=i960-intel + os=-nindy + ;; + np1) + basic_machine=np1-gould + ;; + pa-hitachi) + basic_machine=hppa1.1-hitachi + os=-hiuxwe2 + ;; + paragon) + basic_machine=i860-intel + os=-osf + ;; + pbd) + basic_machine=sparc-tti + ;; + pbb) + basic_machine=m68k-tti + ;; + pc532 | pc532-*) + basic_machine=ns32k-pc532 + ;; + pentium | p5) + basic_machine=i586-intel + ;; + pentiumpro | p6) + basic_machine=i686-intel + ;; + pentium-* | p5-*) + basic_machine=i586-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` + ;; + pentiumpro-* | p6-*) + basic_machine=i686-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` + ;; + k5) + # We don't have specific support for AMD's K5 yet, so just call it a Pentium + basic_machine=i586-amd + ;; + nexen) + # We don't have specific support for Nexgen yet, so just call it a Pentium + basic_machine=i586-nexgen + ;; + pn) + basic_machine=pn-gould + ;; + power) basic_machine=rs6000-ibm + ;; + ppc) basic_machine=powerpc-unknown + ;; + ppc-*) basic_machine=powerpc-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` + ;; + ppcle | powerpclittle | ppc-le | powerpc-little) + basic_machine=powerpcle-unknown + ;; + ppcle-* | powerpclittle-*) + basic_machine=powerpcle-`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/^[^-]*-//'` + ;; + ps2) + basic_machine=i386-ibm + ;; + rm[46]00) + basic_machine=mips-siemens + ;; + rtpc | rtpc-*) + basic_machine=romp-ibm + ;; + sequent) + basic_machine=i386-sequent + ;; + sh) + basic_machine=sh-hitachi + os=-hms + ;; + sps7) + basic_machine=m68k-bull + os=-sysv2 + ;; + spur) + basic_machine=spur-unknown + ;; + sun2) + basic_machine=m68000-sun + ;; + sun2os3) + basic_machine=m68000-sun + os=-sunos3 + ;; + sun2os4) + basic_machine=m68000-sun + os=-sunos4 + ;; + sun3os3) + basic_machine=m68k-sun + os=-sunos3 + ;; + sun3os4) + basic_machine=m68k-sun + os=-sunos4 + ;; + sun4os3) + basic_machine=sparc-sun + os=-sunos3 + ;; + sun4os4) + basic_machine=sparc-sun + os=-sunos4 + ;; + sun4sol2) + basic_machine=sparc-sun + os=-solaris2 + ;; + sun3 | sun3-*) + basic_machine=m68k-sun + ;; + sun4) + basic_machine=sparc-sun + ;; + sun386 | sun386i | roadrunner) + basic_machine=i386-sun + ;; + symmetry) + basic_machine=i386-sequent + os=-dynix + ;; + tower | tower-32) + basic_machine=m68k-ncr + ;; + udi29k) + basic_machine=a29k-amd + os=-udi + ;; + ultra3) + basic_machine=a29k-nyu + os=-sym1 + ;; + vaxv) + basic_machine=vax-dec + os=-sysv + ;; + vms) + basic_machine=vax-dec + os=-vms + ;; + vpp*|vx|vx-*) + basic_machine=f301-fujitsu + ;; + vxworks960) + basic_machine=i960-wrs + os=-vxworks + ;; + vxworks68) + basic_machine=m68k-wrs + os=-vxworks + ;; + vxworks29k) + basic_machine=a29k-wrs + os=-vxworks + ;; + xmp) + basic_machine=xmp-cray + os=-unicos + ;; + xps | xps100) + basic_machine=xps100-honeywell + ;; + none) + basic_machine=none-none + os=-none + ;; + +# Here we handle the default manufacturer of certain CPU types. It is in +# some cases the only manufacturer, in others, it is the most popular. + mips) + if [ x$os = x-linux ]; then + basic_machine=mips-unknown + else + basic_machine=mips-mips + fi + ;; + romp) + basic_machine=romp-ibm + ;; + rs6000) + basic_machine=rs6000-ibm + ;; + vax) + basic_machine=vax-dec + ;; + pdp11) + basic_machine=pdp11-dec + ;; + we32k) + basic_machine=we32k-att + ;; + sparc) + basic_machine=sparc-sun + ;; + cydra) + basic_machine=cydra-cydrome + ;; + orion) + basic_machine=orion-highlevel + ;; + orion105) + basic_machine=clipper-highlevel + ;; + *) + echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': machine \`$basic_machine\' not recognized 1>&2 + exit 1 + ;; +esac + +# Here we canonicalize certain aliases for manufacturers. +case $basic_machine in + *-digital*) + basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/digital.*/dec/'` + ;; + *-commodore*) + basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed 's/commodore.*/cbm/'` + ;; + *) + ;; +esac + +# Decode manufacturer-specific aliases for certain operating systems. + +if [ x"$os" != x"" ] +then +case $os in + # First match some system type aliases + # that might get confused with valid system types. + # -solaris* is a basic system type, with this one exception. + -solaris1 | -solaris1.*) + os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|solaris1|sunos4|'` + ;; + -solaris) + os=-solaris2 + ;; + -unixware* | svr4*) + os=-sysv4 + ;; + -gnu/linux*) + os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|gnu/linux|linux-gnu|'` + ;; + # First accept the basic system types. + # The portable systems comes first. + # Each alternative MUST END IN A *, to match a version number. + # -sysv* is not here because it comes later, after sysvr4. + -gnu* | -bsd* | -mach* | -minix* | -genix* | -ultrix* | -irix* \ + | -*vms* | -sco* | -esix* | -isc* | -aix* | -sunos | -sunos[34]*\ + | -hpux* | -unos* | -osf* | -luna* | -dgux* | -solaris* | -sym* \ + | -amigados* | -msdos* | -newsos* | -unicos* | -aof* | -aos* \ + | -nindy* | -vxsim* | -vxworks* | -ebmon* | -hms* | -mvs* \ + | -clix* | -riscos* | -uniplus* | -iris* | -rtu* | -xenix* \ + | -hiux* | -386bsd* | -netbsd* | -openbsd* | -freebsd* | -riscix* \ + | -lynxos* | -bosx* | -nextstep* | -cxux* | -aout* | -elf* \ + | -ptx* | -coff* | -ecoff* | -winnt* | -domain* | -vsta* \ + | -udi* | -eabi* | -lites* | -ieee* | -go32* | -aux* \ + | -cygwin32* | -pe* | -psos* | -moss* | -proelf* | -rtems* \ + | -linux-gnu* | -uxpv*) + # Remember, each alternative MUST END IN *, to match a version number. + ;; + -linux*) + os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|linux|linux-gnu|'` + ;; + -sunos5*) + os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos5|solaris2|'` + ;; + -sunos6*) + os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sunos6|solaris3|'` + ;; + -osfrose*) + os=-osfrose + ;; + -osf*) + os=-osf + ;; + -utek*) + os=-bsd + ;; + -dynix*) + os=-bsd + ;; + -acis*) + os=-aos + ;; + -ctix* | -uts*) + os=-sysv + ;; + -ns2 ) + os=-nextstep2 + ;; + # Preserve the version number of sinix5. + -sinix5.*) + os=`echo $os | sed -e 's|sinix|sysv|'` + ;; + -sinix*) + os=-sysv4 + ;; + -triton*) + os=-sysv3 + ;; + -oss*) + os=-sysv3 + ;; + -svr4) + os=-sysv4 + ;; + -svr3) + os=-sysv3 + ;; + -sysvr4) + os=-sysv4 + ;; + # This must come after -sysvr4. + -sysv*) + ;; + -xenix) + os=-xenix + ;; + -none) + ;; + *) + # Get rid of the `-' at the beginning of $os. + os=`echo $os | sed 's/[^-]*-//'` + echo Invalid configuration \`$1\': system \`$os\' not recognized 1>&2 + exit 1 + ;; +esac +else + +# Here we handle the default operating systems that come with various machines. +# The value should be what the vendor currently ships out the door with their +# machine or put another way, the most popular os provided with the machine. + +# Note that if you're going to try to match "-MANUFACTURER" here (say, +# "-sun"), then you have to tell the case statement up towards the top +# that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating system. Otherwise, code above +# will signal an error saying that MANUFACTURER isn't an operating +# system, and we'll never get to this point. + +case $basic_machine in + *-acorn) + os=-riscix1.2 + ;; + arm*-semi) + os=-aout + ;; + pdp11-*) + os=-none + ;; + *-dec | vax-*) + os=-ultrix4.2 + ;; + m68*-apollo) + os=-domain + ;; + i386-sun) + os=-sunos4.0.2 + ;; + m68000-sun) + os=-sunos3 + # This also exists in the configure program, but was not the + # default. + # os=-sunos4 + ;; + *-tti) # must be before sparc entry or we get the wrong os. + os=-sysv3 + ;; + sparc-* | *-sun) + os=-sunos4.1.1 + ;; + *-ibm) + os=-aix + ;; + *-hp) + os=-hpux + ;; + *-hitachi) + os=-hiux + ;; + i860-* | *-att | *-ncr | *-altos | *-motorola | *-convergent) + os=-sysv + ;; + *-cbm) + os=-amigados + ;; + *-dg) + os=-dgux + ;; + *-dolphin) + os=-sysv3 + ;; + m68k-ccur) + os=-rtu + ;; + m88k-omron*) + os=-luna + ;; + *-next ) + os=-nextstep + ;; + *-sequent) + os=-ptx + ;; + *-crds) + os=-unos + ;; + *-ns) + os=-genix + ;; + i370-*) + os=-mvs + ;; + *-next) + os=-nextstep3 + ;; + *-gould) + os=-sysv + ;; + *-highlevel) + os=-bsd + ;; + *-encore) + os=-bsd + ;; + *-sgi) + os=-irix + ;; + *-siemens) + os=-sysv4 + ;; + *-masscomp) + os=-rtu + ;; + f301-fujitsu) + os=-uxpv + ;; + *) + os=-none + ;; +esac +fi + +# Here we handle the case where we know the os, and the CPU type, but not the +# manufacturer. We pick the logical manufacturer. +vendor=unknown +case $basic_machine in + *-unknown) + case $os in + -riscix*) + vendor=acorn + ;; + -sunos*) + vendor=sun + ;; + -aix*) + vendor=ibm + ;; + -hpux*) + vendor=hp + ;; + -hiux*) + vendor=hitachi + ;; + -unos*) + vendor=crds + ;; + -dgux*) + vendor=dg + ;; + -luna*) + vendor=omron + ;; + -genix*) + vendor=ns + ;; + -mvs*) + vendor=ibm + ;; + -ptx*) + vendor=sequent + ;; + -vxsim* | -vxworks*) + vendor=wrs + ;; + -aux*) + vendor=apple + ;; + esac + basic_machine=`echo $basic_machine | sed "s/unknown/$vendor/"` + ;; +esac + +echo $basic_machine$os diff --git a/configure.in b/configure.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..069f6bd --- /dev/null +++ b/configure.in @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +dnl -*-fundamental-*- +dnl +dnl $Id: configure.in,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ +dnl +dnl Configuring the Common Files Distribution +dnl +dnl (c) 1997 Mark Wooding +dnl + +dnl----- Licensing notice --------------------------------------------------- +dnl +dnl This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common') +dnl +dnl `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +dnl it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +dnl the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +dnl (at your option) any later version. +dnl +dnl `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +dnl but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +dnl MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +dnl GNU General Public License for more details. +dnl +dnl You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +dnl along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +dnl Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +dnl----- Revision history --------------------------------------------------- +dnl +dnl $Log: configure.in,v $ +dnl Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw +dnl Initial revision +dnl +dnl Revision 1.1.1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw +dnl New import. The old CVS repository was lost in a disk disaster. +AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(common, 1.2.0) + +AC_INIT(mklinks.in) +AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(common, 1.2.4) +AM_PROG_INSTALL +AC_ARG_PROGRAM +AC_OUTPUT(Makefile mklinks findlinks txtlib mkaclocal) diff --git a/elisp-comp b/elisp-comp new file mode 100755 index 0000000..96e4aa5 --- /dev/null +++ b/elisp-comp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +#!/bin/sh +# Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# François Pinard , 1995. +# +# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) +# any later version. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +# This script byte-compiles all `.el' files which are part of its +# arguments, using GNU Emacs, and put the resulting `.elc' files into +# the current directory, so disregarding the original directories used +# in `.el' arguments. +# +# This script manages in such a way that all Emacs LISP files to +# be compiled are made visible between themselves, in the event +# they require or load-library one another. + +if test $# = 0; then + echo 1>&2 "No files given to $0" + exit 1 +else + if test -z "$EMACS" || test "$EMACS" = "t"; then + # Value of "t" means we are running in a shell under Emacs. + # Just assume Emacs is called "emacs". + EMACS=emacs + fi + + tempdir=elc.$$ + mkdir $tempdir + cp $* $tempdir + cd $tempdir + + echo "(setq load-path (cons nil load-path))" > script + $EMACS -q -batch -l script -f batch-byte-compile *.el + mv *.elc .. + + cd .. + rm -fr $tempdir +fi diff --git a/findlinks.in b/findlinks.in new file mode 100755 index 0000000..c3c575d --- /dev/null +++ b/findlinks.in @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +#! /bin/sh +# -*-sh-*- +# +# $Id: findlinks.in,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ +# +# Find files which could be links to the repository +# +# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding +# + +#----- Licensing notice ----------------------------------------------------- +# +# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common'). +# +# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +# (at your option) any later version. +# +# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +#----- Revision history ----------------------------------------------------- +# +# $Log: findlinks.in,v $ +# Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw +# Initial revision +# + +# --- Configuration variables --- + +prefix=@prefix@ +datadir=@datadir@/@PACKAGE@ + +# --- Parse command line arguments --- + +while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do + case $1 in + -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help) + cat <&2 + exit 1 + ;; + esac + shift +done + +# --- Read the names of all the files I support --- +# +# Yes, this is ugly and hacky: well spotted. Shells have a nasty habit of +# spontaneously forking when redirection gets too hard for them to think +# about, so instead of something nice along the lines of +# +# find ... | while read name; do done +# +# I have to stick the whole lot in backticks and echo the result when it's +# all done. Yuk. +# +# Oh, I almost forgot: that colon on the end there, that's to make sure that +# all the entries are surrounded by colons on both sides, which makes the +# pattern match in the `case' below work properly. + +files=` + files="" + find $datadir -type f -print | { while read name; do + files="$files:\`echo $name | sed -e 's;^.*/;;'\`" + done + echo $files; } `: + +# --- Now examine the current directory --- +# +# Remember to include things which are already linked, so that users can say +# `findlinks >.links' without any problems. + +find . \( -type f -o -type l \) -print | while read name; do + base="`echo $name | sed -e 's;^.*/;;'`" + case "$files" in + *:$base:*) + echo $name + ;; + *) + esac +done | sed -e 's,^\./,,' | sort diff --git a/gpl.tex b/gpl.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..95cc8e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/gpl.tex @@ -0,0 +1,459 @@ +% \iffalse +% +% $Id: gpl.tex,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ +% +% The GNU General Public License as a LaTeX section +% +% (c) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +% LaTeX markup and minor formatting changes by Mark Wooding +% + +%----- Revision history ----------------------------------------------------- +% +% $Log: gpl.tex,v $ +% Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw +% Initial revision +% +% --- Previous lives --- +% +% %Log: gpl.tex,v % +% Revision 1.3 1997/07/29 19:49:51 mdw +% Fix address of the FSF. +% +% Revision 1.2 1997/04/28 19:32:26 mdw +% Fix spelling of `License' so that it's American and wrong. +% Also use copyright symbol since I have one, and reformat the verbatim +% text a lttle. +% +% Revision 1.1 1996/11/19 20:51:14 mdw +% Initial revision +% + +% --- Chapter heading --- +% +% We don't know whether this ought to be a section or a chapter. Easy. +% We'll see if chapters are possible. +% +% \fi + +\begingroup +\makeatletter + +\edef\next#1#2#3{\relax + \ifx\chapter\@@undefined + \ifx\documentclass\@notprerr#2\else#3\fi + \else#1\fi +} + +\expandafter\endgroup\next +{ + \let\gpltoplevel\chapter + \let\gplsec\section + \let\gplend\endinput +}{ + \let\gpltoplevel\section + \let\gplsec\subsection + \let\gplend\endinput +}{ + \documentclass[a4paper]{article} + \def\gpltoplevel#1{% + \vspace*{1in}% + \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\LARGE\bfseries#1\hfil}% + \vspace{1in}% + } + \let\gplsec\section + \def\gplend{\end{document}} + \advance\textwidth1in + \advance\oddsidemargin-.5in + \sloppy + \begin{document} +} + +%^^A------------------------------------------------------------------------- +\gpltoplevel{The GNU General Public License} + + +The following is the text of the GNU General Public License, under the terms +of which this software is distrubuted. + +\vspace{12pt} + +\begin{center} +\textbf{GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE} \\ +Version 2, June 1991 +\end{center} + +\begin{center} +Copyright \copyright\ 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. \\ +59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA + +Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies \\ +of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. +\end{center} + + +\gplsec{Preamble} + +The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to +share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended +to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software---to make sure +the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies +to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program +whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation +software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You +can apply it to your programs, too. + +When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our +General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom +to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you +wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you +can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that +you know you can do these things. + +To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to +deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These +restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute +copies of the software, or if you modify it. + +For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or +for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You +must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you +must show them these terms so they know their rights. + +We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) +offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute +and/or modify the software. + +Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that +everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If +the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its +recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any +problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' +reputations. + +Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We +wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will +individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program +proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be +licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + +The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification +follow. + + +\gplsec{Terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification} + +\begin{enumerate} + +\makeatletter \setcounter{\@listctr}{-1} \makeatother + +\item [0.] This License applies to any program or other work which contains a + notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed + under the terms of this General Public License. The ``Program'', + below, refers to any such program or work, and a ``work based on the + Program'' means either the Program or any derivative work under + copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a + portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated + into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without + limitation in the term ``modification''.) Each licensee is addressed + as ``you''. + + Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not + covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of + running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program + is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program + (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that + is true depends on what the Program does. + +\item [1.] You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's + source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you + conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate + copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the + notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; + and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License + along with the Program. + + You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and + you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + +\item [2.] You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion + of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and + distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 + above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + \begin{enumerate} + + \item [(a)] You must cause the modified files to carry prominent + notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any + change. + + \item [(b)] You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, + that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program + or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to + all third parties under the terms of this License. + + \item [(c)] If the modified program normally reads commands + interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running + for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or + display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice + and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you + provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program + under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy + of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is + interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, + your work based on the Program is not required to print an + announcement.) + + \end{enumerate} + + These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If + identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, + and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in + themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those + sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you + distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based + on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of + this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the + entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote + it. + + Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest + your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to + exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or + collective works based on the Program. + + In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program + with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a + storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the + scope of this License. + +\item [3.] You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, + under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of + Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + \begin{enumerate} + + \item [(a)] Accompany it with the complete corresponding + machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the + terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for + software interchange; or, + + \item [(b)] Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + \item [(c)] Accompany it with the information you received as to the + offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative + is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + + \end{enumerate} + + The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for + making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source + code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any + associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control + compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special + exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that + is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the + major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system + on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies + the executable. + + If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access + to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to + copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the + source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the + source along with the object code. + +\item [4.] You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program + except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise + to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will + automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, + parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this + License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties + remain in full compliance. + +\item [5.] You are not required to accept this License, since you have not + signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or + distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are + prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by + modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the + Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and + all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the + Program or works based on it. + +\item [6.] Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the + Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the + original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to + these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further + restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. + You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to + this License. + +\item [7.] If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent + infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), + conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or + otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not + excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot + distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this + License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you + may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent + license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by + all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then + the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to + refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + + If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under + any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to + apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other + circumstances. + + It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any + patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any + such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the + integrity of the free software distribution system, which is + implemented by public license practices. Many people have made + generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed + through that system in reliance on consistent application of that + system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing + to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot + impose that choice. + + This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to + be a consequence of the rest of this License. + +\item [8.] If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in + certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the + original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may + add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those + countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries + not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the + limitation as if written in the body of this License. + +\item [9.] The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new + versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new + versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may + differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program + specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and + ``any later version'', you have the option of following the terms and + conditions either of that version or of any later version published by + the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a + version number of this License, you may choose any version ever + published by the Free Software Foundation. + +\item [10.] If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free + programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the + author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the + Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we + sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the + two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free + software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + +\begin{center} +NO WARRANTY +\end{center} + +\bfseries + +\item [11.] Because the Program is licensed free of charge, there is no + warranty for the Program, to the extent permitted by applicable law. + except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or + other parties provide the program ``as is'' without warranty of any + kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the + implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular + purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the + Program is with you. Should the Program prove defective, you assume + the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction. + +\item [12.] In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in + writing will any copyright holder, or any other party who may modify + and/or redistribute the program as permitted above, be liable to you + for damages, including any general, special, incidental or + consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the + program (including but not limited to loss of data or data being + rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a + failure of the Program to operate with any other programs), even if + such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of such + damages. + +\end{enumerate} + +\begin{center} +\textbf{END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS} +\end{center} + + +\gplsec{Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs} + +If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible +use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software +which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + +To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to +attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the +exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the ``copyright'' +line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + +\begin{verbatim} + +Copyright (C) 19yy + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +(at your option) any later version. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +GNU General Public License for more details. + +You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. +\end{verbatim} + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + +If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when +it starts in an interactive mode: + +\begin{verbatim} +Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author +Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type +`show w'. +This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it +under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. +\end{verbatim} + +The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate +parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be +called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be +mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your +school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the program, if +necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + +\begin{verbatim} +Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program +`Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. + +, 1 April 1989 +Ty Coon, President of Vice +\end{verbatim} + +This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into +proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may +consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the +library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public +License instead of this License. + +\gplend diff --git a/gpl.texi b/gpl.texi new file mode 100644 index 0000000..23ba261 --- /dev/null +++ b/gpl.texi @@ -0,0 +1,398 @@ +@c This GPL is meant to be included from other files. +@c To format a standalone GPL, use license.texi. + +@center Version 2, June 1991 + +@display +Copyright @copyright{} 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA + +Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies +of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. +@end display + +@unnumberedsec Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software---to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + +@iftex +@unnumberedsec TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +@end iftex +@ifinfo +@center TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +@end ifinfo + +@enumerate 0 +@item +This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The ``Program'', below, +refers to any such program or work, and a ``work based on the Program'' +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term ``modification''.) Each licensee is addressed as ``you''. + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + +@item +You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + +@item +You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + +@enumerate a +@item +You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices +stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + +@item +You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in +whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any +part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third +parties under the terms of this License. + +@item +If the modified program normally reads commands interactively +when run, you must cause it, when started running for such +interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an +announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a +notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide +a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under +these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this +License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but +does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on +the Program is not required to print an announcement.) +@end enumerate + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + +@item +You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + +@enumerate a +@item +Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable +source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections +1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + +@item +Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three +years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your +cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete +machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be +distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium +customarily used for software interchange; or, + +@item +Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer +to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is +allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you +received the program in object code or executable form with such +an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) +@end enumerate + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + +@item +You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + +@item +You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + +@item +Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + +@item +If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + +@item +If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + +@item +The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and ``any +later version'', you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + +@item +If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + +@iftex +@vskip -@baselineskip +@vskip -@baselineskip +@heading NO WARRANTY +@end iftex +@ifinfo +@center NO WARRANTY +@end ifinfo + +@item +BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM ``AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + +@item +IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. +@end enumerate + +@iftex +@heading END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS +@end iftex +@ifinfo +@center END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS +@end ifinfo + +@page +@unnumberedsec How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it +free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest +to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least +the ``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + +@smallexample +@var{one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.} +Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author} + +This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License +as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 +of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + +This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +GNU General Public License for more details. + +You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. +@end smallexample + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + +If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this +when it starts in an interactive mode: + +@smallexample +Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author} +Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details +type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome +to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' +for details. +@end smallexample + +The hypothetical commands @samp{show w} and @samp{show c} should show +the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the +commands you use may be called something other than @samp{show w} and +@samp{show c}; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items---whatever +suits your program. + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your +school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the program, if +necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + +@example +@group +Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright +interest in the program `Gnomovision' +(which makes passes at compilers) written +by James Hacker. + +@var{signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1989 +Ty Coon, President of Vice +@end group +@end example + +This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into +proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may +consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the +library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General +Public License instead of this License. diff --git a/install-sh b/install-sh new file mode 100755 index 0000000..e843669 --- /dev/null +++ b/install-sh @@ -0,0 +1,250 @@ +#!/bin/sh +# +# install - install a program, script, or datafile +# This comes from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh). +# +# Copyright 1991 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology +# +# Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its +# documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that +# the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that +# copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting +# documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or +# publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, +# written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the +# suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" +# without express or implied warranty. +# +# Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent +# `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it +# when there is no Makefile. +# +# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written +# from scratch. It can only install one file at a time, a restriction +# shared with many OS's install programs. + + +# set DOITPROG to echo to test this script + +# Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it. +doit="${DOITPROG-}" + + +# put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars. + +mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}" +cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}" +chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}" +chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}" +chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}" +stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}" +rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}" +mkdirprog="${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}" + +transformbasename="" +transform_arg="" +instcmd="$mvprog" +chmodcmd="$chmodprog 0755" +chowncmd="" +chgrpcmd="" +stripcmd="" +rmcmd="$rmprog -f" +mvcmd="$mvprog" +src="" +dst="" +dir_arg="" + +while [ x"$1" != x ]; do + case $1 in + -c) instcmd="$cpprog" + shift + continue;; + + -d) dir_arg=true + shift + continue;; + + -m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2" + shift + shift + continue;; + + -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2" + shift + shift + continue;; + + -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2" + shift + shift + continue;; + + -s) stripcmd="$stripprog" + shift + continue;; + + -t=*) transformarg=`echo $1 | sed 's/-t=//'` + shift + continue;; + + -b=*) transformbasename=`echo $1 | sed 's/-b=//'` + shift + continue;; + + *) if [ x"$src" = x ] + then + src=$1 + else + # this colon is to work around a 386BSD /bin/sh bug + : + dst=$1 + fi + shift + continue;; + esac +done + +if [ x"$src" = x ] +then + echo "install: no input file specified" + exit 1 +else + true +fi + +if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ]; then + dst=$src + src="" + + if [ -d $dst ]; then + instcmd=: + else + instcmd=mkdir + fi +else + +# Waiting for this to be detected by the "$instcmd $src $dsttmp" command +# might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad +# if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'. + + if [ -f $src -o -d $src ] + then + true + else + echo "install: $src does not exist" + exit 1 + fi + + if [ x"$dst" = x ] + then + echo "install: no destination specified" + exit 1 + else + true + fi + +# If destination is a directory, append the input filename; if your system +# does not like double slashes in filenames, you may need to add some logic + + if [ -d $dst ] + then + dst="$dst"/`basename $src` + else + true + fi +fi + +## this sed command emulates the dirname command +dstdir=`echo $dst | sed -e 's,[^/]*$,,;s,/$,,;s,^$,.,'` + +# Make sure that the destination directory exists. +# this part is taken from Noah Friedman's mkinstalldirs script + +# Skip lots of stat calls in the usual case. +if [ ! -d "$dstdir" ]; then +defaultIFS=' +' +IFS="${IFS-${defaultIFS}}" + +oIFS="${IFS}" +# Some sh's can't handle IFS=/ for some reason. +IFS='%' +set - `echo ${dstdir} | sed -e 's@/@%@g' -e 's@^%@/@'` +IFS="${oIFS}" + +pathcomp='' + +while [ $# -ne 0 ] ; do + pathcomp="${pathcomp}${1}" + shift + + if [ ! -d "${pathcomp}" ] ; + then + $mkdirprog "${pathcomp}" + else + true + fi + + pathcomp="${pathcomp}/" +done +fi + +if [ x"$dir_arg" != x ] +then + $doit $instcmd $dst && + + if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dst; else true ; fi && + if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dst; else true ; fi && + if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dst; else true ; fi && + if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dst; else true ; fi +else + +# If we're going to rename the final executable, determine the name now. + + if [ x"$transformarg" = x ] + then + dstfile=`basename $dst` + else + dstfile=`basename $dst $transformbasename | + sed $transformarg`$transformbasename + fi + +# don't allow the sed command to completely eliminate the filename + + if [ x"$dstfile" = x ] + then + dstfile=`basename $dst` + else + true + fi + +# Make a temp file name in the proper directory. + + dsttmp=$dstdir/#inst.$$# + +# Move or copy the file name to the temp name + + $doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp && + + trap "rm -f ${dsttmp}" 0 && + +# and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits + +# If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing. If we want to +# ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore +# errors from the above "$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp" command. + + if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && + if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && + if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && + if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dsttmp; else true;fi && + +# Now rename the file to the real destination. + + $doit $rmcmd -f $dstdir/$dstfile && + $doit $mvcmd $dsttmp $dstdir/$dstfile + +fi && + + +exit 0 diff --git a/lgpl.tex b/lgpl.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a52b9cd --- /dev/null +++ b/lgpl.tex @@ -0,0 +1,577 @@ +% \iffalse +% +% $Id: lgpl.tex,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ +% +% The GNU Library General Public License as a LaTeX section +% +% (c) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +% LaTeX markup and minor formatting changes by Mark Wooding +% + +%----- Revision history ----------------------------------------------------- +% +% $Log: lgpl.tex,v $ +% Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw +% Initial revision +% + +% --- Chapter heading --- +% +% We don't know whether this ought to be a section or a chapter. Easy. +% We'll see if chapters are possible. +% +% \fi + +\begingroup +\makeatletter + +\edef\next#1#2#3{\relax + \ifx\chapter\@@undefined + \ifx\documentclass\@notprerr#2\else#3\fi + \else#1\fi +} + +\expandafter\endgroup\next +{ + \let\gpltoplevel\chapter + \let\gplsec\section + \let\gplend\endinput +}{ + \let\gpltoplevel\section + \let\gplsec\subsection + \let\gplend\endinput +}{ + \documentclass[a4paper]{article} + \def\gpltoplevel#1{% + \vspace*{1in}% + \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\LARGE\bfseries#1\hfil}% + \vspace{1in}% + } + \let\gplsec\section + \def\gplend{\end{document}} + \advance\textwidth1in + \advance\oddsidemargin-.5in + \sloppy + \begin{document} +} + +%^^A------------------------------------------------------------------------- +\gpltoplevel{The GNU Library General Public License} + +The following is the text of the GNU Library General Public License, under +the terms of which this software is distrubuted. + +\vspace{12pt} + +\begin{center} +\textbf{GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE} \\ +Version 2, June 1991 +\end{center} + +\begin{center} +Copyright \copyright\ 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. \\ +59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA + +Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies \\ +of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. +\end{center} + + +\gplsec{Preamble} + +The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to +share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are +intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make +sure the software is free for all its users. + +This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some specially +designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any other libraries +whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for your libraries, too. + +When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our +General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom +to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you +wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you +can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that +you know you can do these things. + +To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to +deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These +restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute +copies of the library, or if you modify it. + +For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a +fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must +make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link a +program with the library, you must provide complete object files to the +recipients so that they can relink them with the library, after making +changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these +terms so they know their rights. + +Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright the +library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to +copy, distribute and/or modify the library. + +Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain that +everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free library. If the +library is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to +know that what they have is not the original version, so that any problems +introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. + +Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We +wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free software will +individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the program +into proprietary software. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + +Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU +General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This +license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain +designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary one; +be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same +as in the ordinary license. + +The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they +blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a program +and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without changing the +library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is analogous to +running a utility program or application program. However, in a textual and +legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a derivative of the +original library, and the ordinary General Public License treats it as such. + +Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General Public +License for libraries did not effectively promote software sharing, because +most developers did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker +conditions might promote sharing better. + +However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of +those programs of all benefit from the free status of the libraries +themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to permit +developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while preserving your +freedom as a user of such programs to change the free libraries that are +incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve this as regards +changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards changes in the +actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead to faster +development of free libraries. + +The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification +follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a ``work based on the +library'' and a ``work that uses the library''. The former contains code +derived from the library, while the latter only works together with the +library. + +Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General +Public License rather than by this special one. + + +\gplsec{Terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification} + +\begin{enumerate} + +\makeatletter \setcounter{\@listctr}{-1} \makeatother + +\item [0.] This License Agreement applies to any software library which + contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized + party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library + General Public License (also called ``this License''). Each licensee + is addressed as ``you''. + + A ``library'' means a collection of software functions and/or data + prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs + (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. + + The ``Library'', below, refers to any such software library or work + which has been distributed under these terms. A ``work based on the + Library'' means either the Library or any derivative work under + copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a + portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated + straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is + included without limitation in the term ``modification''.) + + ``Source code'' for a work means the preferred form of the work for + making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means + all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated + interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control + compilation and installation of the library. + + Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not + covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of + running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from + such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based + on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for + writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and + what the program that uses the Library does. + +\item [1.] You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's + complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that + you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate + copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the + notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; + and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. + + You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and + you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + +\item [2.] You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion + of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and + distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 + above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + \begin{enumerate} + + \item [(a)] The modified work must itself be a software library. + + \item [(b)] You must cause the files modified to carry prominent + notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any + change. + + \item [(c)] You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no + charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. + + \item [(d)] If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function + or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that + uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the + facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to + ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such + function or table, the facility still operates, and performs + whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. + + (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has + a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the + application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any + application-supplied function or table used by this function must + be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square + root function must still compute square roots.) + + \end{enumerate} + + These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If + identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, + and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in + themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those + sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you + distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based + on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of + this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the + entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote + it. + + Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest + your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to + exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or + collective works based on the Library. + + In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library + with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a + storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the + scope of this License. + +\item [3.] You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public + License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do + this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so + that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, + instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the + ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify + that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in + these notices. + + Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that + copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all + subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. + + This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the + Library into a program that is not a library. + +\item [4.] You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or + derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form + under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany + it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which + must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a + medium customarily used for software interchange. + + If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from + a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source + code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the + source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the + source along with the object code. + +\item [5.] A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the + Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or + linked with it, is called a ``work that uses the Library''. Such a + work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and + therefore falls outside the scope of this License. + + However, linking a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library + creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it + contains portions of the Library), rather than a ``work that uses the + library''. The executable is therefore covered by this License. + Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. + + When a ``work that uses the Library'' uses material from a header file + that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a + derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. + Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be + linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The + threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. + + If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure + layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten + lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is + unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. + (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library + will still fall under Section 6.) + + Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may + distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. + Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether + or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. + +\item [6.] As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or + link a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library to produce a + work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under + terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of + the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for + debugging such modifications. + + You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the + Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by + this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work + during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the + copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference + directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one + of these things: + + \begin{enumerate} + + \item [(a)] Accompany the work with the complete corresponding + machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever + changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under + Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked + with the Library, with the complete machine-readable ``work that + uses the Library'', as object code and/or source code, so that + the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a + modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is + understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions + files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile + the application to use the modified definitions.) + + \item [(b)] Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at + least three years, to give the same user the materials specified + in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of + performing this distribution. + + \item [(c)] If distribution of the work is made by offering access to + copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the + above specified materials from the same place. + + \item [(d)] Verify that the user has already received a copy of these + materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. + + \end{enumerate} + + For an executable, the required form of the ``work that uses the + Library'' must include any data and utility programs needed for + reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, + the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally + distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major + components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on + which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies + the executable. + + It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license + restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally + accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot + use both them and the Library together in an executable that you + distribute. + +\item [7.] You may place library facilities that are a work based on the + Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library + facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined + library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on + the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise + permitted, and provided that you do these two things: + + \begin{enumerate} + + \item [(a)] Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work + based on the Library, uncombined with any other library + facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the + Sections above. + + \item [(b)] Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact + that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining + where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. + + \end{enumerate} + +\item [8.] You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute + the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any + attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute + the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under + this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, + from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so + long as such parties remain in full compliance. + +\item [9.] You are not required to accept this License, since you have not + signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or + distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are + prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by + modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the + Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and + all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the + Library or works based on it. + +\item [10.] Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the + Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the + original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library + subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further + restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. + You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to + this License. + +\item [11.] If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent + infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), + conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or + otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not + excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot + distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this + License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you + may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent + license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by + all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then + the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to + refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. + + If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under + any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to + apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other + circumstances. + + It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any + patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any + such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the + integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented + by public license practices. Many people have made generous + contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that + system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up + to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute + software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that + choice. + + This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to + be a consequence of the rest of this License. + +\item [12.] If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in + certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the + original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may + add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those + countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries + not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the + limitation as if written in the body of this License. + +\item [13.] The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new + versions of the Library General Public License from time to time. Such + new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may + differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library + specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and + ``any later version'', you have the option of following the terms and + conditions either of that version or of any later version published by + the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a + license version number, you may choose any version ever published by + the Free Software Foundation. + +\item [14.] If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free + programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, + write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is + copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software + Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will + be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all + derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse + of software generally. + +\begin{center} +NO WARRANTY +\end{center} + +\bfseries + +\item [15.] Because the Library is licensed free of charge, there is no + warranty for the Library, to the extent permitted by applicable law. + Except when otherwise stated in writing the copyright holders and/or + other parties provide the Library ``as is'' without warranty of any + kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the + implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular + purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the + Library is with you. Should the Library prove defective, you assume + the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction. + +\item [16.] In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in + writing will any copyright holder, or any other party who may modify + and/or redistribute the Library as permitted above, be liable to you + for damages, including any general, special, incidental or + consequential damages arising out of the use or inability to use the + Library (including but not limited to loss of data or data being + rendered inaccurate or losses sustained by you or third parties or a + failure of the Library to operate with any other software), even if + such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of such + damages. + +\end{enumerate} + +\begin{center} +\textbf{END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS} +\end{center} + + +\gplsec{Appendix: How to apply these terms to your new libraries} + +If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible +use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can +redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under +these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General +Public License). + +To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is +safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the +``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + +\begin{verbatim} + +Copyright (C) + +This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public +License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either +version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + +This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU +Library General Public License for more details. + +You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License +along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. +\end{verbatim} + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your +school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the library, if +necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + +\begin{verbatim} +Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the +library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James +Random Hacker. + +, 1 April 1990 +Ty Coon, President of Vice +\end{verbatim} + +That's all there is to it! + +\gplend diff --git a/lgpl.texi b/lgpl.texi new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2db17b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/lgpl.texi @@ -0,0 +1,549 @@ +@c This LGPL is meant to be included from other files. +@c To format a standalone LGPL, use liblic.texi. + +@ifset lgpl-appendix +@appendix GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE +@end ifset + +@ifclear lgpl-appendix +@unnumbered GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE +@end ifclear +@center Version 2, June 1991 + +@display +Copyright @copyright{} 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA + +Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies +of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + +[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is + numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.] +@end display + +@unnumberedsec Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change +free software---to make sure the software is free for all its users. + + This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some +specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any +other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for +your libraries, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if +you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis +or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave +you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source +code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide +complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them +with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling +it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. + + Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright +the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal +permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. + + Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original +version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on +the original authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free +software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect +transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this, +we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's +free use or not licensed at all. + + Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary +GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This +license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain +designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary +one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is +the same as in the ordinary license. + + The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that +they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a +program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without +changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is +analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in +a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a +derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License +treats it as such. + + Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General +Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software +sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We +concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better. + + However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the +users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the +libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to +permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while +preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free +libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve +this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards +changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this +will lead to faster development of free libraries. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a +``work based on the library'' and a ``work that uses the library''. The +former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only +works together with the library. + + Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary +General Public License rather than by this special one. + +@iftex +@unnumberedsec TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +@end iftex +@ifinfo +@center TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +@end ifinfo + +@enumerate 0 +@item +This License Agreement applies to any software library which +contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized +party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library +General Public License (also called ``this License''). Each licensee is +addressed as ``you''. + + A ``library'' means a collection of software functions and/or data +prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs +(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. + + The ``Library'', below, refers to any such software library or work +which has been distributed under these terms. A ``work based on the +Library'' means either the Library or any derivative work under +copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a +portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated +straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is +included without limitation in the term ``modification''.) + + ``Source code'' for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means +all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated +interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation +and installation of the library. + + Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from +such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based +on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for +writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does +and what the program that uses the Library does. + +@item +You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's +complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that +you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an +appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact +all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any +warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the +Library. + + You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, +and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a +fee. + +@item +You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + +@enumerate a +@item +The modified work must itself be a software library. + +@item +You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices +stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + +@item +You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no +charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. + +@item +If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a +table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses +the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility +is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, +in the event an application does not supply such function or +table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of +its purpose remains meaningful. + +(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has +a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the +application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any +application-supplied function or table used by this function must +be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square +root function must still compute square roots.) +@end enumerate + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote +it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Library. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library +with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + +@item +You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public +License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do +this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so +that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, +instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the +ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify +that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in +these notices. + + Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for +that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all +subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. + + This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of +the Library into a program that is not a library. + +@item +You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or +derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form +under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany +it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which +must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a +medium customarily used for software interchange. + + If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy +from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the +source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to +distribute the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + +@item +A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the +Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or +linked with it, is called a ``work that uses the Library''. Such a +work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and +therefore falls outside the scope of this License. + + However, linking a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library +creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it +contains portions of the Library), rather than a ``work that uses the +library''. The executable is therefore covered by this License. +Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. + + When a ``work that uses the Library'' uses material from a header file +that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a +derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. +Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be +linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The +threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. + + If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data +structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline +functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object +file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative +work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the +Library will still fall under Section 6.) + + Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may +distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. +Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, +whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. + +@item +As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or +link a ``work that uses the Library'' with the Library to produce a +work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work +under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit +modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse +engineering for debugging such modifications. + + You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the +Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by +this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work +during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the +copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference +directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one +of these things: + +@enumerate a +@item +Accompany the work with the complete corresponding +machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever +changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under +Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked +with the Library, with the complete machine-readable ``work that +uses the Library'', as object code and/or source code, so that the +user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified +executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood +that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the +Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application +to use the modified definitions.) + +@item +Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at +least three years, to give the same user the materials +specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more +than the cost of performing this distribution. + +@item +If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy +from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above +specified materials from the same place. + +@item +Verify that the user has already received a copy of these +materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. +@end enumerate + + For an executable, the required form of the ``work that uses the +Library'' must include any data and utility programs needed for +reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, +the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally +distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major +components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on +which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies +the executable. + + It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license +restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally +accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot +use both them and the Library together in an executable that you +distribute. + +@item +You may place library facilities that are a work based on the +Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library +facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined +library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on +the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise +permitted, and provided that you do these two things: + +@enumerate a +@item +Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work +based on the Library, uncombined with any other library +facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the +Sections above. + +@item +Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact +that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining +where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. +@end enumerate + +@item +You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute +the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any +attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or +distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your +rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, +or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses +terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. + +@item +You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the +Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Library or works based on it. + +@item +Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the +Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library +subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + +@item +If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any +particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, +and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + +@item +If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add +an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, +so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus +excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if +written in the body of this License. + +@item +The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new +versions of the Library General Public License from time to time. +Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, +but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and +``any later version'', you have the option of following the terms and +conditions either of that version or of any later version published by +the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a +license version number, you may choose any version ever published by +the Free Software Foundation. + +@item +If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, +write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is +copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free +Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our +decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status +of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing +and reuse of software generally. + +@iftex +@heading NO WARRANTY +@end iftex +@ifinfo +@center NO WARRANTY +@end ifinfo + +@item +BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO +WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. +EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR +OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY ``AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY +KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE +IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR +PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE +LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME +THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + +@item +IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN +WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY +AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU +FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR +CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE +LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING +RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A +FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF +SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGES. +@end enumerate + +@iftex +@heading END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS +@end iftex +@ifinfo +@center END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS +@end ifinfo + +@page +@unnumberedsec How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries + + If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that +everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting +redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the +ordinary General Public License). + + To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is +safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the +``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + +@smallexample +@var{one line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does.} +Copyright (C) @var{year} @var{name of author} + +This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public +License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either +version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + +This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU +Library General Public License for more details. + +You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public +License along with this library; if not, write to the +Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Cambridge, +MA 02139, USA. +@end smallexample + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + +You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your +school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the library, if +necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: + +@example +Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in +the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written +by James Random Hacker. + +@var{signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1990 +Ty Coon, President of Vice +@end example + +That's all there is to it! diff --git a/mdate-sh b/mdate-sh new file mode 100755 index 0000000..37171f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/mdate-sh @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +#!/bin/sh +# Get modification time of a file or directory and pretty-print it. +# Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# written by Ulrich Drepper , June 1995 +# +# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) +# any later version. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +# Prevent date giving response in another language. +LANG=C +export LANG +LC_ALL=C +export LC_ALL +LC_TIME=C +export LC_TIME + +# Get the extended ls output of the file or directory. +# On HPUX /bin/sh, "set" interprets "-rw-r--r--" as options, so the "x" below. +if ls -L /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then + set - x`ls -L -l -d $1` +else + set - x`ls -l -d $1` +fi +# The month is at least the fourth argument +# (3 shifts here, the next inside the loop). +shift +shift +shift + +# Find the month. Next argument is day, followed by the year or time. +month= +until test $month +do + shift + case $1 in + Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;; + Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;; + Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;; + Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;; + May) month=May; nummonth=5;; + Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;; + Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;; + Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;; + Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;; + Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;; + Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;; + Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;; + esac +done + +day=$2 + +# Here we have to deal with the problem that the ls output gives either +# the time of day or the year. +case $3 in + *:*) set `date`; eval year=\$$# + case $2 in + Jan) nummonthtod=1;; + Feb) nummonthtod=2;; + Mar) nummonthtod=3;; + Apr) nummonthtod=4;; + May) nummonthtod=5;; + Jun) nummonthtod=6;; + Jul) nummonthtod=7;; + Aug) nummonthtod=8;; + Sep) nummonthtod=9;; + Oct) nummonthtod=10;; + Nov) nummonthtod=11;; + Dec) nummonthtod=12;; + esac + # For the first six month of the year the time notation can also + # be used for files modified in the last year. + if (expr $nummonth \> $nummonthtod) > /dev/null; + then + year=`expr $year - 1` + fi;; + *) year=$3;; +esac + +# The result. +echo $day $month $year diff --git a/mdwopt.c b/mdwopt.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000..37d6581 --- /dev/null +++ b/mdwopt.c @@ -0,0 +1,785 @@ +/* -*-c-*- + * + * $Id: mdwopt.c,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ + * + * Options parsing, similar to GNU @getopt_long@ + * + * (c) 1996 Mark Wooding + */ + +/*----- Licensing notice --------------------------------------------------* + * + * This file is part of many programs. + * + * `mdwopt' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + * it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as + * published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the + * License, or (at your option) any later version. + * + * `mdwopt' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + * GNU Library General Public License for more details. + * + * You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public + * License along with `mdwopt'; if not, write to the Free Software + * Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + */ + +/*----- Revision history --------------------------------------------------* + * + * $Log: mdwopt.c,v $ + * Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw + * Initial revision + * + * --- Previous lives --- + * + * %Log: mdwopt.c,v % + * Revision 1.7 1997/09/11 09:19:11 mdw + * (mo__nextWord): Arrrgh. Don't free the environment variable buffer! + * People are still using it! + * + * Revision 1.6 1997/09/11 09:05:54 mdw + * (mo__nextWord): Fix bug which returns too many words from environment + * variables. + * + * Revision 1.5 1997/08/09 20:27:59 mdw + * Fix spelling of `Licensing'. + * + * Revision 1.4 1997/07/29 21:11:35 mdw + * Reformatted. Fixed buffer overflow when dealing with environment + * variables. Included NT in list of daft operating systems with `\' as a + * path separator. Fixed address of the FSF. + * + * Revision 1.3 1997/02/26 00:41:10 mdw + * Added GPL notice to the top. Slight formatting changes. + * + * Revision 1.2 1996/10/28 13:12:13 mdw + * Fixed calls to ctype.h routines. Arguments are cast to unsigned char + * to avoid invoking undefined behaviour caused by signedness of chars. + * + * Revision 1.1 1996/09/24 18:01:28 mdw + * Initial revision + * + */ + +/*----- External dependencies ---------------------------------------------*/ + +#include +#include +#include +#include + +#include "mdwopt.h" + +/*----- Configuration things ----------------------------------------------*/ + +#if defined(__riscos) +# define PATHSEP '.' +#elif defined(__OS2__) || defined(__MSDOS__) || defined(__WINNT__) +# define PATHSEP '\\' +#else /* Assume a sane filing system */ +# define PATHSEP '/' +#endif + +/*----- Global variables --------------------------------------------------*/ + +mdwopt_data mdwopt_global = {0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0}; + +enum { + ord__permute = 0, /* Permute the options (default) */ + ord__return = 1, /* Return non-option things */ + ord__posix = 2, /* Do POSIX-type hacking */ + ord__negate = 4 /* Magic negate-next-thing flag */ +}; + +/*----- Main code ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* --- @mo__nextWord@ --- * + * + * Arguments: @int argc@ = number of command line options + * @char *argv[]@ = pointer to command line options + * @mdwopt_data *data@ = pointer to persistent state + * + * Returns: Pointer to the next word to handle, or 0 + * + * Use: Extracts the next word from the command line or environment + * variable. + */ + +static char *mo__nextWord(int argc, char *const *argv, mdwopt_data *data) +{ + if (data->ind == -1) { + char *p = data->env; + char *q; + while (isspace((unsigned char)*p)) + p++; + q = p; + while (*p && !isspace((unsigned char)*p)) + p++; + data->env = p; + if (*p) + *p++ = 0; + if (p != q) + return (q); + data->env = 0; + data->ind = 1; + } + + if (data->next == argc) + return (0); + return (argv[data->next++]); +} + +/* --- @mo__permute@ --- * + * + * Arguments: @char *argv[]@ = pointer to command line arguments + * @mdwopt_data *data@ = pointer to persistent data + * + * Returns: -- + * + * Use: Moves a command line option into the right place. + */ + +static void mo__permute(char *const *argv, mdwopt_data *data) +{ + char **v = (char **)argv; + if (data->ind != -1) { + int i = data->next - 1; + char *p = v[i]; + while (i > data->ind) { + v[i] = v[i - 1]; + i--; + } + v[i] = p; + data->ind++; + } +} + +/* --- @mo__findOpt@ --- * + * + * Arguments: @int o@ = which option to search for + * @const char *shortopt@ = short options string to search + * @mdwopt_data *data@ = pointer to persistant state + * + * Returns: Pointer to rest of short options string (including magic + * characters) + * + * Use: Looks up a short option in the given string. + */ + +static const char *mo__findOpt(int o, const char *shortopt, + mdwopt_data *data) +{ + const char *p = shortopt; /* Point to short opts table */ + for (;;) { + if (!*p) /* No more options left */ + return (0); + + if (o != *p || (p[1] != '+' && data->order & ord__negate)) { + p++; /* Skip this option entry */ + while (*p == '+') /* Jump a `%|+|%' sign */ + p++; + while (*p == ':') /* And jump any `%|:|%' characters */ + p++; /* Just in case there are any */ + } + else + return (p + 1); + } +} + +/* --- @mdwopt@ --- * + * + * Arguments: @int argc@ = number of command line arguments + * @char * const *argv@ = pointer to command line arguments + * @const char *shortopt@ = pointer to short options information + * @const struct option *longopts@ = pointer to long opts info + * @int *longind@ = where to store matched longopt + * @mdwopt_data *data@ = persistent state for the parser + * @int flags@ = various useful flags + * + * Returns: Value of option found next, or an error character, or + * @EOF@ for the last thing. + * + * Use: Reads options. The routine should be more-or-less compatible + * with standard getopts, although it provides many more + * features even than the standard GNU implementation. + * + * The precise manner of options parsing is determined by + * various flag settings, which are described below. By setting + * flag values appropriately, you can achieve behaviour very + * similar to most other getopt routines. + * + * + * How options parsing appears to users + * + * A command line consists of a number of `words' (which may + * contain spaces, according to various shell quoting + * conventions). A word may be an option, an argument to an + * option, or a non-option. An option begins with a special + * character, usually `%|-|%', although `%|+|%' is also used + * sometimes. As special exceptions, the word containing only a + * `%|-|%' is considered to be a non-option, since it usually + * represents standard input or output as a filename, and the + * word containing a double-dash `%|--|%' is used to mark all + * following words as being non-options regardless of their + * initial character. + * + * Traditionally, all words after the first non-option have been + * considered to be non-options automatically, so that options + * must be specified before filenames. However, this + * implementation can extract all the options from the command + * line regardless of their position. This can usually be + * disabled by setting one of the environment variables + * `%|POSIXLY_CORRECT|%' or `%|_POSIX_OPTION_ORDER|%'. + * + * There are two different styles of options: `short' and + * `long'. + * + * Short options are the sort which Unix has known for ages: an + * option is a single letter, preceded by a `%|-|%'. Short + * options can be joined together to save space (and possibly to + * make silly words): e.g., instead of giving options + * `%|-x -y|%', a user could write `%|-xy|%'. Some short + * options can have arguments, which appear after the option + * letter, either immediately following, or in the next `word' + * (so an option with an argument could be written as + * `%|-o foo|%' or as `%|-ofoo|%'). Note that options with + * optional arguments must be written in the second style. + * + * When a short option controls a flag setting, it is sometimes + * possible to explicitly turn the flag off, as well as turning + * it on, (usually to override default options). This is + * usually done by using a `%|+|%' instead of a `%|-|%' to + * introduce the option. + * + * Long options, as popularised by the GNU utilities, are given + * long-ish memorable names, preceded by a double-dash `%|--|%'. + * Since their names are more than a single character, long + * options can't be combined in the same way as short options. + * Arguments to long options may be given either in the same + * `word', separated from the option name by an equals sign, or + * in the following `word'. + * + * Long option names can be abbreviated if necessary, as long + * as the abbreviation is unique. This means that options can + * have sensible and memorable names but still not require much + * typing from an experienced user. + * + * Like short options, long options can control flag settings. + * The options to manipulate these settings come in pairs: an + * option of the form `%|--set-flag|%' might set the flag, while + * an option of the form `%|--no-set-flag|%' might clear it. + * + * It is usual for applications to provide both short and long + * options with identical behaviour. Some applications with + * lots of options may only provide long options (although they + * will often be only two or three characters long). In this + * case, long options can be preceded with a single `%|-|%' + * character, and negated by a `%|+|%' character. + * + * Finally, some (older) programs accept arguments of the form + * `%%@.{"-"}%%', to set some numerical parameter, + * typically a line count of some kind. + * + * + * How programs parse options + * + * An application parses its options by calling mdwopt + * repeatedly. Each time it is called, mdwopt returns a value + * describing the option just read, and stores information about + * the option in a data block. The value %$-1$% is returned + * when there are no more options to be read. The `%|?|%' + * character is returned when an error is encountered. + * + * Before starting to parse options, the value @data->ind@ must + * be set to 0 or 1. The value of @data->err@ can also be set, + * to choose whether errors are reported by mdwopt. + * + * The program's `@argc@' and `@argv@' arguments are passed to + * the options parser, so that it can read the command line. A + * flags word is also passed, allowing the program fine control + * over parsing. The flags are described above. + * + * Short options are described by a string, which once upon a + * time just contained the permitted option characters. Now the + * options string begins with a collection of flag characters, + * and various flag characters can be put after options + * characters to change their properties. + * + * If the first character of the short options string is + * `%|+|%', `%|-|%' or `%|!|%', the order in which options are + * read is modified, as follows: + * + * `%|+|%' forces the POSIX order to be used. As soon as a non- + * option is found, mdwopt returns %$-1$%. + * + * `%|-|%' makes mdwopt treat non-options as being `special' + * sorts of option. When a non-option word is found, the + * value 0 is returned, and the actual text of the word + * is stored as being the option's argument. + * + * `%|!|%' forces the default order to be used. The entire + * command line is scanned for options, which are + * returned in order. However, during this process, + * the options are moved in the @argv@ array, so that + * they appear before the non- options. + * + * A `%|:|%' character may be placed after the ordering flag (or + * at the very beginning if no ordering flag is given) which + * indicates that the character `%|:|%', rather than `%|?|%', + * should be returned if a missing argument error is detected. + * + * Each option in the string can be followed by a `%|+|%' sign, + * indicating that it can be negated, a `%|:|%' sign indicating + * that it requires an argument, or a `%|::|%' string, + * indicating an optional argument. Both `%|+|%' and `%|:|%' or + * `%|::|%' may be given, although the `%|+|%' must come first. + * + * If an option is found, the option character is returned to + * the caller. A pointer to an argument is stored in + * @data->arg@, or @NULL@ is stored if there was no argument. + * If a negated option was found, the option character is + * returned ORred with @gFlag_negated@ (bit 8 set). + * + * Long options are described in a table. Each entry in the + * table is of type @struct option@, and the table is terminated + * by an entry whose @name@ field is null. Each option has + * a flags word which, due to historical reasons, is called + * @has_arg@. This describes various properties of the option, + * such as what sort of argument it takes, and whether it can + * be negated. + * + * When mdwopt finds a long option, it looks the name up in the + * table. The index of the matching entry is stored in the + * @longind@ variable, passed to mdwopt (unless @longind@ is 0): + * a value of %$-1$% indicates that no long option was + * found. The behaviour is then dependent on the values in the + * table entry. If @flag@ is nonzero, it points to an integer + * to be modified by mdwopt. Usually the value in the @val@ + * field is simply stored in the @flag@ variable. If the flag + * @gFlag_switch@ is set, however, the value is combined with + * the existing value of the flags using a bitwise OR. If + * @gFlag_negate@ is set, then the flag bit will be cleared if a + * matching negated long option is found. The value 0 is + * returned. + * + * If @flag@ is zero, the value in @val@ is returned by mdwopt, + * possibly with bit 8 set if the option was negated. + * + * Arguments for long options are stored in @data->arg@, as + * before. + * + * Numeric options, if enabled, cause the value `%|#|%' to be + * returned, and the numeric value to be stored in @data->opt@. + * + * If the flag @gFlag_envVar@ is set on entry, options will be + * extracted from an environment variable whose name is built by + * capitalising all the letters of the program's name. (This + * allows a user to have different default settings for a + * program, by calling it through different symbolic links.) */ + +int mdwopt(int argc, char *const *argv, + const char *shortopt, + const struct option *longopts, int *longind, + mdwopt_data *data, int flags) +{ + /* --- Local variables --- */ + + char *p, *q, *r; /* Some useful things to have */ + char *prefix; /* Prefix from this option */ + int i; /* Always useful */ + char noarg = '?'; /* Standard missing-arg char */ + + /* --- Sort out our data --- */ + + if (!data) /* If default data requested */ + data = &mdwopt_global; /* Then use the global stuff */ + + /* --- See if this is the first time --- */ + + if (data->ind == 0 || (data->ind == 1 && ~flags & gFlag_noProgName)) { + + /* --- Sort out default returning order --- */ + + if (getenv("_POSIX_OPTION_ORDER") || /* Examine environment for opts */ + getenv("POSIXLY_CORRECT")) /* To see if we disable features */ + data->order = ord__posix; /* If set, use POSIX ordering */ + else + data->order = ord__permute; /* Otherwise mangle the options */ + + /* --- Now see what the caller actually wants --- */ + + switch (shortopt[0]) { /* Look at the first character */ + case '-': /* `%|-|%' turns on in-orderness */ + data->order = ord__return; + break; + case '+': /* `%|+|%' turns on POSIXness */ + data->order = ord__posix; + break; + case '!': /* `%|!|%' ignores POSIXness */ + data->order = ord__permute; + break; + } + + /* --- Now decide on the program's name --- */ + + if (~flags & gFlag_noProgName) { + p = q = (char *)argv[0]; + while (*p) { + if (*p++ == PATHSEP) + q = p; + } + data->prog = q; + + data->ind = data->next = 1; + data->list = 0; + + /* --- See about environment variables --- * + * + * Be careful. The program may be setuid, and an attacker might have + * given us a long name in @argv[0]@. If the name is very long, don't + * support this option. + */ + + if (flags & gFlag_envVar && strlen(data->prog) < 48) { + + char buf[64]; + + /* --- For RISC OS, support a different format --- * + * + * Acorn's RISC OS tends to put settings in variables named + * `App$Options' rather than `APP'. Under RISC OS, I'll support + * both methods, just to avoid confuddlement. + */ + +#ifdef __riscos + sprintf(buf, "%s$Options", data->prog); + p = getenv(buf); + if (!p) { +#endif + + p = buf; /* Point to a buffer */ + q = data->prog; /* Point to program name */ + while (*q) /* While characters left here */ + *p++ = toupper(*q++); /* Copy and uppercase */ + *p++ = 0; /* Terminate my copy of this */ + p = getenv(buf); /* Get the value of the variable */ + +#ifdef __riscos + } +#endif + + /* --- Copy the options string into a buffer --- */ + + if (p) { /* If it is defined */ + q = malloc(strlen(p) + 1); /* Allocate space for a copy */ + if (!q) { /* If that failed */ + fprintf(stderr, /* Report a nice error */ + "%s: Not enough memory to read settings in " + "environment variable\n", + data->prog); + } else { /* Otherwise */ + strcpy(q, p); /* Copy the text over */ + data->ind = -1; /* Mark that we're parsing envvar */ + data->env = data->estart = q; /* And store the pointer away */ + } + } + + } + } + else + data->ind = data->next = 0; + } + + /* --- Do some initial bodgery --- * + * + * The @shortopt@ string can have some interesting characters at the + * beginning. We'll skip past them. + */ + + switch (shortopt[0]) { + case '+': + case '-': + case '!': + shortopt++; + break; + } + + if (shortopt[0] == ':') { + noarg = shortopt[0]; + shortopt++; + } + + if (longind) /* Allow longind to be null */ + *longind = -1; /* Clear this to avoid confusion */ + data->opt = -1; /* And this too */ + data->arg = 0; /* No option set up here */ + + /* --- Now go off and search for an option --- */ + + if (!data->list || !*data->list) { + data->order &= 3; /* Clear negation flag */ + + /* --- Now we need to find the next option --- * + * + * Exactly how we do this depends on the settings of the order variable. + * We identify options as being things starting with `%|-|%', and which + * aren't equal to `%|-|%' or `%|--|%'. We'll look for options until: + * + * * We find something which isn't an option AND @order == ord__posix@ + * * We find a `%|--|%' + * * We reach the end of the list + * + * There are some added little wrinkles, which we'll meet as we go. + */ + + for (;;) { /* Keep looping for a while */ + p = mo__nextWord(argc, argv, data); /* Get the next word out */ + if (!p) /* If there's no next word */ + return (EOF); /* There's no more now */ + + /* --- See if we've found an option --- */ + + if ((p[0] == '-' || (p[0] == '+' && flags & gFlag_negation)) && + p[1] != 0) { + if (strcmp(p, "--") == 0) { /* If this is the magic marker */ + mo__permute(argv, data); /* Stow the magic marker item */ + return (EOF); /* There's nothing else to do */ + } + break; /* We've found something! */ + } + + /* --- Figure out how to proceed --- */ + + switch (data->order & 3) { + case ord__posix: /* POSIX option order */ + return (EOF); /* This is easy */ + break; + case ord__permute: /* Permute the option order */ + break; + case ord__return: /* Return each argument */ + mo__permute(argv, data); /* Insert word in same place */ + data->arg = p; /* Point to the argument */ + return (0); /* Return the value */ + } + } + + /* --- We found an option --- */ + + mo__permute(argv, data); /* Do any permuting necessary */ + + /* --- Check for a numeric option --- * + * + * We only check the first character (or the second if the first is a + * sign). This ought to be enough. + */ + + if (flags & gFlag_numbers && (p[0] == '-' || flags & gFlag_negNumber)) { + if (((p[1] == '+' || p[1] == '-') && isdigit((unsigned char)p[2])) || + isdigit((unsigned char)p[1])) { + data->opt = strtol(p + 1, &data->arg, 10); + while (isspace((unsigned char)data->arg[0])) + data->arg++; + if (!data->arg[0]) + data->arg = 0; + return (p[0] == '-' ? '#' : '#' | gFlag_negated); + } + } + + /* --- Check for a long option --- */ + + if (p[0] == '+') + data->order |= ord__negate; + + if (((p[0] == '-' && p[1] == '-') || + (flags & gFlag_noShorts && !mo__findOpt(p[1], shortopt, data))) && + (~flags & gFlag_noLongs)) /* Is this a long option? */ + { + int match = -1; /* Count matches as we go */ + + if (p[0] == '+') { /* If it's negated */ + data->order |= ord__negate; /* Set the negate flag */ + p++; /* Point to the main text */ + prefix = "+"; /* Set the prefix string up */ + } else if (p[1] == '-') { /* If this is a `%|--|%' option */ + if ((flags & gFlag_negation) && strncmp(p + 2, "no-", 3) == 0) { + p += 5; /* Point to main text */ + prefix = "--no-"; /* And set the prefix */ + data->order |= ord__negate; /* Set the negatedness flag */ + } else { + p += 2; /* Point to the main text */ + prefix = "--"; /* Remember the prefix string */ + } + } else { + if ((flags & gFlag_negation) && strncmp(p + 1, "no-", 3) == 0) { + p += 4; /* Find the text */ + prefix = "-no-"; /* Set the prefix */ + data->order |= ord__negate; /* Set negatedness flag */ + } else { + p++; /* Otherwise find the text */ + prefix = "-"; /* And remember the prefix */ + } + } + + for (i = 0; longopts[i].name; i++) { /* Loop through the options */ + if ((data->order & ord__negate) && + (~longopts[i].has_arg & gFlag_negate)) + continue; /* If neg and opt doesn't allow */ + + r = (char *) longopts[i].name; /* Point to the name string */ + q = p; /* Point to the string start */ + for (;;) { /* Do a loop here */ + if (*q == 0 || *q == '=') { /* End of the option string? */ + if (*r == 0) { /* If end of other string */ + match = i; /* This is the match */ + goto botched; /* And exit the loop now */ + } + if (match == -1) { /* If no match currently */ + match = i; /* Then this is it, here */ + break; /* Stop looking now */ + } else { + match = -1; /* Else it's ambiguous */ + goto botched; /* So give up right now */ + } + } + else if (*q != *r) /* Otherwise if mismatch */ + break; /* Abort this loop */ + q++, r++; /* Increment the counters */ + } + } + + botched: + if (match == -1) { /* If we couldn't find a match */ + if (data->err) { + fprintf(stderr, "%s: unrecognised option `%s%s'\n", + data->prog, + prefix, p); + } + return ('?'); + } + + if (longind) /* Allow longind to be null */ + *longind = match; /* Store the match away */ + + /* --- Handle argument behaviour --- */ + + while (*p != 0 && *p != '=') /* Find the argument string */ + p++; + p = (*p ? p + 1 : 0); /* Sort out argument presence */ + q = (char *) longopts[match].name; /* Remember the name here */ + + switch (longopts[match].has_arg & 3) { + case no_argument: + if (p) { + if (data->err) { + fprintf(stderr, + "%s: option `%s%s' does not accept arguments\n", + data->prog, + prefix, q); + } + return ('?'); + } + break; + + case required_argument: + if (!p) { /* If no argument given */ + p = mo__nextWord(argc, argv, data); + + if (!p) { /* If no more arguments */ + if (data->err) { + fprintf(stderr, "%s: option `%s%s' requires an argument\n", + data->prog, + prefix, q); + } + return (noarg); + } + + mo__permute(argv, data); + } + break; + + case optional_argument: + /* Who cares? */ + break; + } + data->arg = p; + + /* --- Do correct things now we have a match --- */ + + if (longopts[match].flag) { /* If he has a @flag@ argument */ + if (longopts[match].has_arg & gFlag_switch) { + if (data->order & ord__negate) + *longopts[match].flag &= ~longopts[match].val; + else + *longopts[match].flag |= longopts[match].val; + } else { + if (data->order & ord__negate) + *longopts[match].flag = 0; + else + *longopts[match].flag = longopts[match].val; + } + return (0); /* And return something */ + } else { + if (data->order & ord__negate) + return (longopts[match].val | gFlag_negated); + else + return (longopts[match].val); + } + } + + /* --- Do short options things --- */ + + else { + if (p[0] == '+') /* If starts with a `%|+|%' */ + data->order |= ord__negate; + data->list = p + 1; /* Omit leading `%|-|%'/`%|+|%' */ + } + } + + /* --- Now process the short options --- */ + + i = *data->list++; /* Get the next option letter */ + data->opt = i; /* Store this away nicely */ + + p = (char *) mo__findOpt(i, shortopt, data); + if (!p) { /* No more options left */ + if (data->err) { + fprintf(stderr, "%s: unknown option `%c%c'\n", + data->prog, + data->order & ord__negate ? '+' : '-', + i); + } + return ('?'); + } + + data->opt = i; /* Store this for the caller */ + + /* --- Sort out an argument, if we expect one --- */ + + if (p[0] == ':') { /* If we expect an option */ + q = (data->list[0] ? data->list : 0); /* If argument expected, use it */ + data->list = 0; /* Kill the remaining options */ + if (p[1] != ':' && !q) { /* If no arg, and not optional */ + + /* --- Same code as before --- */ + + q = mo__nextWord(argc, argv, data); /* Read the next word */ + if (!q) { /* If no more arguments */ + if (data->err) { + fprintf(stderr, "%s: option `%c%c' requires an argument\n", + data->prog, + data->order & ord__negate ? '+' : '-', + i); + } + return (noarg); + } + mo__permute(argv, data); + } + + data->arg = q; + } + return ((data->order & ord__negate) ? i | gFlag_negated : i); +} + +/*----- That's all, folks -------------------------------------------------*/ diff --git a/mdwopt.h b/mdwopt.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1615669 --- /dev/null +++ b/mdwopt.h @@ -0,0 +1,426 @@ +/* -*-c-*- + * + * $Id: mdwopt.h,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ + * + * Options parsing, similar to GNU @getopt_long@ + * + * (c) 1996 Mark Wooding + */ + +/*----- Licensing notice --------------------------------------------------* + * + * This file is part of many programs. + * + * `mdwopt' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify + * it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as + * published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the + * License, or (at your option) any later version. + * + * `mdwopt' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + * GNU Library General Public License for more details. + * + * You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public + * License along with `mdwopt'; if not, write to the Free Software + * Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + */ + +/*----- Revision history --------------------------------------------------* + * + * $Log: mdwopt.h,v $ + * Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw + * Initial revision + * + * --- Previous lives --- + * + * %Log: mdwopt.h,v % + * Revision 1.5 1997/08/09 20:27:59 mdw + * Fix spelling of `Licensing'. + * + * Revision 1.4 1997/07/29 21:11:49 mdw + * Fixed address of the FSF. + * + * Revision 1.3 1996/12/31 19:41:33 mdw + * Formatting changes. + * + * Revision 1.2 1996/11/23 00:47:25 mdw + * Added `MdwOpt' object from the `anagram' source code. + * + * Revision 1.1 1996/09/24 18:01:43 mdw + * Initial revision + * + */ + +#ifndef MDWOPT_H +#define MDWOPT_H + +/*----- Options handling structures ---------------------------------------*/ + +#ifdef __cplusplus + extern "C" { +#endif + +/* --- @mdwopt_data@ --- * + * + * Contains all the information needed by the @mdwopt@ routine to do its + * work. + */ + +typedef struct { + /* --- Public variables --- */ + + char *arg; /* Arg of current option, or 0 */ + int opt; /* Value of current option */ + int ind; /* 0 for init, index when done */ + int err; /* Set nonzero for error messages */ + char *prog; /* Program name (from @argv[0]@) */ + + /* --- Private variables --- * + * + * Don't play with these, please. + */ + + char *list; /* Current short options pointer */ + int next; /* Next argument, unpermuted */ + int order; /* Ordering of options, flags */ + char *env; /* Where we are in the env var */ + char *estart; /* Pointer to env var buffer */ +} +mdwopt_data; + +/*----- Global variables --------------------------------------------------*/ + +extern mdwopt_data mdwopt_global; /* The default global data */ + +/* --- For compatibility with older programs (and prettiness) --- * + * + * The macros here access the global structure defined above. I consider it + * to be perfectly acceptable to use these macros in new code, because it + * looks nicer than playing with @mdwopt_global@. + */ + +#define optarg (mdwopt_global.arg) /* Argument of current option */ +#define optopt (mdwopt_global.opt) /* Code of current option */ +#define opterr (mdwopt_global.err) /* Zero to report error messages */ +#define optind (mdwopt_global.ind) /* Index of first non-option */ +#define optprog (mdwopt_global.prog) /* Pointer to program name */ + +/*----- Type definitions --------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* --- Long options definition table --- */ + +struct option { + const char *name; /* Name of the long option */ + int has_arg; /* Does it have an argument? */ + int *flag; /* Address of flag variable */ + int val; /* Value to store/return */ +}; + +/* --- Old-style names for argument flags in long options table --- */ + +enum { + no_argument, /* No argument required */ + required_argument, /* User must specify argument */ + optional_argument /* Argument is optional */ +}; + +/* --- New style flag names --- */ + +enum { + gFlag_argReq = 1, /* Required argument */ + gFlag_argOpt = 2, /* Optional argument */ + gFlag_switch = 4, /* OR val into flag, don't store */ + gFlag_negate = 8, /* Allow long option to be negated */ + gFlag__last_long_opt_flag = 0 /* Dummy value */ +}; + +enum { + gFlag_noLongs = 1, /* Don't read long options */ + gFlag_noShorts = 2, /* Don't read short options */ + gFlag_numbers = 4, /* Read numeric options */ + gFlag_negation = 8, /* Allow `%|+|%' for negations */ + gFlag_envVar = 16, /* Parse options from env var */ + gFlag_noProgName = 32, /* Don't set @optprog@ */ + gFlag_negNumber = 64, /* Allow negated number options */ + gFlag__last_mdwopt_flag = 0 /* Dummy value */ +}; + +enum { + gFlag_negated = 256, /* Option flag was negated by user */ + gFlag__last_return_flag = 0 /* Dummy value */ +}; + +/*----- Main code ---------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* --- @mdwopt@ --- * + * + * Arguments: @int argc@ = number of command line arguments + * @char * const *argv@ = pointer to command line arguments + * @const char *shortopt@ = pointer to short options information + * @const struct option *longopts@ = pointer to long opts info + * @int *longind@ = where to store matched longopt + * @mdwopt_data *data@ = persistent state for the parser + * @int flags@ = various useful flags + * + * Returns: Value of option found next, or an error character, or + * @EOF@ for the last thing. + * + * Use: Reads options. The routine should be more-or-less compatible + * with standard getopts, although it provides many more + * features even than the standard GNU implementation. + * + * The precise manner of options parsing is determined by + * various flag settings, which are described below. By setting + * flag values appropriately, you can achieve behaviour very + * similar to most other getopt routines. + * + * + * How options parsing appears to users + * + * A command line consists of a number of `words' (which may + * contain spaces, according to various shell quoting + * conventions). A word may be an option, an argument to an + * option, or a non-option. An option begins with a special + * character, usually `%|-|%', although `%|+|%' is also used + * sometimes. As special exceptions, the word containing only a + * `%|-|%' is considered to be a non-option, since it usually + * represents standard input or output as a filename, and the + * word containing a double-dash `%|--|%' is used to mark all + * following words as being non-options regardless of their + * initial character. + * + * Traditionally, all words after the first non-option have been + * considered to be non-options automatically, so that options + * must be specified before filenames. However, this + * implementation can extract all the options from the command + * line regardless of their position. This can usually be + * disabled by setting one of the environment variables + * `%|POSIXLY_CORRECT|%' or `%|_POSIX_OPTION_ORDER|%'. + * + * There are two different styles of options: `short' and + * `long'. + * + * Short options are the sort which Unix has known for ages: an + * option is a single letter, preceded by a `%|-|%'. Short + * options can be joined together to save space (and possibly to + * make silly words): e.g., instead of giving options + * `%|-x.-y|%', a user could write `%|-xy|%'. Some short + * options can have arguments, which appear after the option + * letter, either immediately following, or in the next `word' + * (so an option with an argument could be written as + * `%|-o foo|%' or as `%|-ofoo|%'). Note that options with + * optional arguments must be written in the second style. + * + * When a short option controls a flag setting, it is sometimes + * possible to explicitly turn the flag off, as well as turning + * it on, (usually to override default options). This is + * usually done by using a `%|+|%' instead of a `%|-|%' to + * introduce the option. + * + * Long options, as popularised by the GNU utilities, are given + * long-ish memorable names, preceded by a double-dash `%|--|%'. + * Since their names are more than a single character, long + * options can't be combined in the same way as short options. + * Arguments to long options may be given either in the same + * `word', separated from the option name by an equals sign, or + * in the following `word'. + * + * Long option names can be abbreviated if necessary, as long + * as the abbreviation is unique. This means that options can + * have sensible and memorable names but still not require much + * typing from an experienced user. + * + * Like short options, long options can control flag settings. + * The options to manipulate these settings come in pairs: an + * option of the form `%|--set-flag|%' might set the flag, while + * an option of the form `%|--no-set-flag|%' might clear it. + * + * It is usual for applications to provide both short and long + * options with identical behaviour. Some applications with + * lots of options may only provide long options (although they + * will often be only two or three characters long). In this + * case, long options can be preceded with a single `%|-|%' + * character, and negated by a `%|+|%' character. + * + * Finally, some (older) programs accept arguments of the form + * `%%@.{"-"}%%', to set some numerical parameter, + * typically a line count of some kind. + * + * + * How programs parse options + * + * An application parses its options by calling mdwopt + * repeatedly. Each time it is called, mdwopt returns a value + * describing the option just read, and stores information about + * the option in a data block. The value %$-1$% is returned + * when there are no more options to be read. The `%|?|%' + * character is returned when an error is encountered. + * + * Before starting to parse options, the value @data->ind@ must + * be set to 0 or 1. The value of @data->err@ can also be set, + * to choose whether errors are reported by mdwopt. + * + * The program's `@argc@' and `@argv@' arguments are passed to + * the options parser, so that it can read the command line. A + * flags word is also passed, allowing the program fine control + * over parsing. The flags are described above. + * + * Short options are described by a string, which once upon a + * time just contained the permitted option characters. Now the + * options string begins with a collection of flag characters, + * and various flag characters can be put after options + * characters to change their properties. + * + * If the first character of the short options string is + * `%|+|%', `%|-|%' or `%|!|%', the order in which options are + * read is modified, as follows: + * + * `%|+|%' forces the POSIX order to be used. As soon as a non- + * option is found, mdwopt returns %$-1$%. + * + * `%|-|%' makes mdwopt treat non-options as being `special' + * sorts of option. When a non-option word is found, the + * value 0 is returned, and the actual text of the word + * is stored as being the option's argument. + * + * `%|!|%' forces the default order to be used. The entire + * command line is scanned for options, which are + * returned in order. However, during this process, + * the options are moved in the @argv@ array, so that + * they appear before the non- options. + * + * A `%|:|%' character may be placed after the ordering flag (or + * at the very beginning if no ordering flag is given) which + * indicates that the character `%|:|%', rather than `%|?|%', + * should be returned if a missing argument error is detected. + * + * Each option in the string can be followed by a `%|+|%' sign, + * indicating that it can be negated, a `%|:|%' sign indicating + * that it requires an argument, or a `%|::|%' string, + * indicating an optional argument. Both `%|+|%' and `%|:|%' or + * `%|::|%' may be given, although the `%|+|%' must come first. + * + * If an option is found, the option character is returned to + * the caller. A pointer to an argument is stored in + * @data->arg@, or @NULL@ is stored if there was no argument. + * If a negated option was found, the option character is + * returned ORred with @gFlag_negated@ (bit 8 set). + * + * Long options are described in a table. Each entry in the + * table is of type @struct option@, and the table is terminated + * by an entry whose @name@ field is null. Each option has + * a flags word which, due to historical reasons, is called + * @has_arg@. This describes various properties of the option, + * such as what sort of argument it takes, and whether it can + * be negated. + * + * When mdwopt finds a long option, it looks the name up in the + * table. The index of the matching entry is stored in the + * @longind@ variable, passed to mdwopt (unless @longind@ is 0): + * a value of %$-1$% indicates that no long option was + * found. The behaviour is then dependent on the values in the + * table entry. If @flag@ is nonzero, it points to an integer + * to be modified by mdwopt. Usually the value in the @val@ + * field is simply stored in the @flag@ variable. If the flag + * @gFlag_switch@ is set, however, the value is combined with + * the existing value of the flags using a bitwise OR. If + * @gFlag_negate@ is set, then the flag bit will be cleared if a + * matching negated long option is found. The value 0 is + * returned. + * + * If @flag@ is zero, the value in @val@ is returned by mdwopt, + * possibly with bit 8 set if the option was negated. + * + * Arguments for long options are stored in @data->arg@, as + * before. + * + * Numeric options, if enabled, cause the value `%|#|%' to be + * returned, and the numeric value to be stored in @data->opt@. + * + * If the flag @gFlag_envVar@ is set on entry, options will be + * extracted from an environment variable whose name is built by + * capitalising all the letters of the program's name. (This + * allows a user to have different default settings for a + * program, by calling it through different symbolic links.) */ + +extern int mdwopt(int /*argc*/, char *const */*argv*/, + const char */*shortopt*/, + const struct option */*longopts*/, int */*longind*/, + mdwopt_data */*data*/, int /*flags*/); + +/* --- Macros for more commonly used routines --- */ + +#define getopt(c, v, o) mdwopt(c, v, o, 0, 0, 0, gFlag_noLongs) +#define getopt_long(c, v, o, l, li) mdwopt(c, v, o, l, li, 0, 0) +#define getopt_long_only(c, v, o, l, li) \ + mdwopt(c, v, o, l, li, 0, gFlag_noShorts) + +#ifdef __cplusplus +} +#endif + +/*----- C++ wrapper class -------------------------------------------------*/ + +#ifdef __cplusplus + +/* --- Class: @MdwOpt@ --- * + * + * Parent: --- + * + * Methods: @MdwOpt@ -- construct a new mdwopt object with the given + * arguments. These are remembered for later use. + * @arg@ -- return the argument of the current option + * arguments. These are remembered for later use. + * @arg@ -- return the argument of the current option + * @opt@ -- return the value of the current option + * @ind@ -- return the index of the next unread argument + * @longind@ -- return index of current long option in table + * @errors@ -- return or set whether we report errors to the + * user + * @prog@ -- return program name from @argv[0]@ + * @next@ -- return next option read from the table + * + * Use: A simple C++ class for encapsulating the options parser. + * The methods are all nice and simple, and extremely similar + * to the normal C interface described above. + */ + +class MdwOpt { + protected: + int argc; + char * const *argv; + const char *shortopts; + const struct option *longopts; + int long_ind; + int flags; + + mdwopt_data data; + + public: + MdwOpt(int c, char * const *v, const char *so, + const struct option *lo, int f=0) : + argc(c), argv(v), shortopts(so), longopts(lo), flags(f) { + data.ind = 0; + data.err = 1; + } + + const char *arg(void) const { return (data.arg); } + int opt(void) const { return (data.opt); } + int errors(void) const { return (data.err); } + int errors(int e) { int oe = data.err; data.err = e; return (oe); } + int ind(void) const { return (data.ind); } + int longind(void) const { return (long_ind); } + const char *prog(void) const { return (data.prog); } + + int next(void) { + return (mdwopt(argc, argv, shortopts, + longopts, &long_ind, &data, flags)); + } +}; + +#endif + +/*----- That's all, folks -------------------------------------------------*/ + +#endif diff --git a/missing b/missing new file mode 100755 index 0000000..a6abd06 --- /dev/null +++ b/missing @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ +#! /bin/sh +# Common stub for a few missing GNU programs while installing. +# Copyright (C) 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# Franc,ois Pinard , 1996. + +# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) +# any later version. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. + +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA +# 02111-1307, USA. + +if test $# -eq 0; then + echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information" + exit 1 +fi + +case "$1" in + + -h|--h|--he|--hel|--help) + echo "\ +$0 [OPTION]... PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]... + +Handle \`PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...' for when PROGRAM is missing, or return an +error status if there is no known handling for PROGRAM. + +Options: + -h, --help display this help and exit + -v, --version output version information and exit + +Supported PROGRAM values: + aclocal touch file \`aclocal.m4' + autoconf touch file \`configure' + autoheader touch file \`config.h.in' + automake touch all \`Makefile.in' files + bison touch file \`y.tab.c' + makeinfo touch the output file + yacc touch file \`y.tab.c'" + ;; + + -v|--v|--ve|--ver|--vers|--versi|--versio|--version) + echo "missing - GNU libit 0.0" + ;; + + -*) + echo 1>&2 "$0: Unknown \`$1' option" + echo 1>&2 "Try \`$0 --help' for more information" + exit 1 + ;; + + aclocal) + echo 1>&2 "\ +WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if + you modified \`acinclude.m4' or \`configure.in'. You might want + to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages. Grab them from + any GNU archive site." + touch aclocal.m4 + ;; + + autoconf) + echo 1>&2 "\ +WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if + you modified \`configure.in'. You might want to install the + \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages. Grab them from any GNU + archive site." + touch configure + ;; + + autoheader) + echo 1>&2 "\ +WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if + you modified \`acconfig.h' or \`configure.in'. You might want + to install the \`Autoconf' and \`GNU m4' packages. Grab them + from any GNU archive site." + touch config.h.in + ;; + + automake) + echo 1>&2 "\ +WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if + you modified \`Makefile.am', \`acinclude.m4' or \`configure.in'. + You might want to install the \`Automake' and \`Perl' packages. + Grab them from any GNU archive site." + find . -type f -name Makefile.am -print \ + | sed 's/^\(.*\).am$/touch \1.in/' \ + | sh + ;; + + bison|yacc) + echo 1>&2 "\ +WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if + you modified a \`.y' file. You may need the \`Bison' package + in order for those modifications to take effect. You can get + \`Bison' from any GNU archive site." + touch y.tab.c + ;; + + makeinfo) + echo 1>&2 "\ +WARNING: \`$1' is missing on your system. You should only need it if + you modified a \`.texi' or \`.texinfo' file, or any other file + indirectly affecting the aspect of the manual. The spurious + call might also be the consequence of using a buggy \`make' (AIX, + DU, IRIX). You might want to install the \`Texinfo' package or + the \`GNU make' package. Grab either from any GNU archive site." + file=`echo "$*" | sed -n 's/.*-o \([^ ]*\).*/\1/p'` + if test -z "$file"; then + file=`echo "$*" | sed 's/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/'` + file=`sed -n '/^@setfilename/ { s/.* \([^ ]*\) *$/\1/; p; q; }' $file` + fi + touch $file + ;; + + *) + echo 1>&2 "\ +WARNING: \`$1' is needed, and you do not seem to have it handy on your + system. You might have modified some files without having the + proper tools for further handling them. Check the \`README' file, + it often tells you about the needed prerequirements for installing + this package. You may also peek at any GNU archive site, in case + some other package would contain this missing \`$1' program." + exit 1 + ;; +esac + +exit 0 diff --git a/mkaclocal.in b/mkaclocal.in new file mode 100755 index 0000000..e184a6d --- /dev/null +++ b/mkaclocal.in @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ +#! /bin/sh +# -*-sh-*- +# +# $Id: mkaclocal.in,v 1.2 1997/09/11 09:06:33 mdw Exp $ +# +# Create an `aclocal.m4' file containing the right macros. +# +# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding +# + +#----- Licensing notice ----------------------------------------------------- +# +# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common'). +# +# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +# (at your option) any later version. +# +# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +#----- Revision history ----------------------------------------------------- +# +# $Log$ + +# --- Configuration variables --- + +prefix=@prefix@ +exec_prefix=@exec_prefix@ +bindir=@bindir@ +datadir=@datadir@/@PACKAGE@ + +# --- Parse command line --- + +mode=x +out="aclocal.m4" +in="configure.in" + +while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do + case $1 in + -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help) + cat <&2 + exit 1 + ;; + *) + break + ;; + esac + shift +done + +set \ + "$datadir/aclocal.glob" \ + `test -r $datadir/aclocal.site && echo "$datadir/aclocal.site"` \ + `test -r ./aclocal.lib && echo "./aclocal.lib"` \ + "$@" + +# --- Now do the job --- + +case $mode in + + l) + $bindir/txtlib -l "$@" | sort | uniq + ;; + + x) + t=/tmp/mkaclocal.$$ + if mkdir -m 700 $t; then : + else + echo >&2 "mkaclocal: cculd not creat etemporary directory" + exit 1 + fi + echo -NOTICE- >$t/a + created=no + + $bindir/txtlib -l "$@" | sort | uniq | while read LINE; do + echo "/$LINE/ i\\ +$LINE" + done >$t/sed + + until { echo -NOTICE-; sed -n -f $t/sed $in; } | sort | uniq >$t/b + cmp -s $t/a $t/b + do + $bindir/txtlib "$@" <$t/b >$out.tmp + in=$out.tmp + mv $t/b $t/a + created=yes + done + + if [ "$created" = "yes" ]; then + { test -r ./aclocal.lib && + grep "\*@--TOP--@\*" ./aclocal.lib >/dev/null && + sed -e "/\*@--TOP--@\*/, $ d" ./aclocal.lib + cat $out.tmp + } >$out + else + rm -f $out + fi + + rm -fr $t $out.tmp + ;; +esac diff --git a/mkinstalldirs b/mkinstalldirs new file mode 100755 index 0000000..a01481b --- /dev/null +++ b/mkinstalldirs @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +#! /bin/sh +# mkinstalldirs --- make directory hierarchy +# Author: Noah Friedman +# Created: 1993-05-16 +# Public domain + +# $Id: mkinstalldirs,v 1.10 1996/05/03 07:37:52 friedman Exp $ + +errstatus=0 + +for file +do + set fnord `echo ":$file" | sed -ne 's/^:\//#/;s/^://;s/\// /g;s/^#/\//;p'` + shift + + pathcomp= + for d + do + pathcomp="$pathcomp$d" + case "$pathcomp" in + -* ) pathcomp=./$pathcomp ;; + esac + + if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then + echo "mkdir $pathcomp" 1>&2 + + mkdir "$pathcomp" || lasterr=$? + + if test ! -d "$pathcomp"; then + errstatus=$lasterr + fi + fi + + pathcomp="$pathcomp/" + done +done + +exit $errstatus + +# mkinstalldirs ends here diff --git a/mklinks.in b/mklinks.in new file mode 100755 index 0000000..bc27bbf --- /dev/null +++ b/mklinks.in @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +#! /bin/sh + +# -*-sh-*- +# +# $Id: mklinks.in,v 1.4 1997/09/11 09:06:34 mdw Exp $ +# +# Create links to the repository +# +# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding +# + +#----- Licensing notice ----------------------------------------------------- +# +# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common'). +# +# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +# (at your option) any later version. +# +# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +#----- Revision history ----------------------------------------------------- +# +# $Log$ + +# --- Configuration variables --- + +prefix=@prefix@ +datadir=@datadir@/@PACKAGE@ + +# --- Parse command line arguments --- + +while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do + case $1 in + -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help) + cat <&2 + exit 1 + ;; + *) + break + ;; + esac + shift +done + +# --- Main code --- +# +# This is really trivial. + +[ $# = 0 ] && set .links +cat "$@" | while read name; do + base="`echo $name | sed -e 's;^.*/;;'`" + [ -r "$datadir/$base" ] && ln -sf "$datadir/$base" "$name" +done diff --git a/setup b/setup new file mode 100755 index 0000000..f8ae051 --- /dev/null +++ b/setup @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +#! /bin/sh + +set -e +mkaclocal || cp aclocal.glob aclocal.m4 +autoconf +automake +mkdir build diff --git a/texinfo.tex b/texinfo.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d106eb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/texinfo.tex @@ -0,0 +1,5462 @@ +% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. +% +% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. +\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi +% +\def\texinfoversion{1998-11-06}% +% +% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98 +% Free Software Foundation, Inc. +% +% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or +% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as +% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at +% your option) any later version. +% +% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be +% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty +% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU +% General Public License for more details. +% +% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write +% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, +% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. +% +% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program. +% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve +% what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding! +% +% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug +% reports; you can get the latest version from: +% ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/texinfo.tex +% /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines. +% (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html) +% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex +% ftp://ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex +% (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@ctan.org for a list). +% The texinfo.tex in the texinfo distribution itself could well be out +% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. +% +% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. +% Please include a precise test case in each bug report, +% including a complete document with which we can reproduce the problem. +% +% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the +% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For simple +% manuals, however, you can get away with: +% tex foo.texi +% texindex foo.?? +% tex foo.texi +% tex foo.texi +% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file. +% The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct. +% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more +% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. + +\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} + +% If in a .fmt file, print the version number +% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because +% they might have appeared in the input file name. +\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% + \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} + +% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine. + +\let\ptexb=\b +\let\ptexbullet=\bullet +\let\ptexc=\c +\let\ptexcomma=\, +\let\ptexdot=\. +\let\ptexdots=\dots +\let\ptexend=\end +\let\ptexequiv=\equiv +\let\ptexexclam=\! +\let\ptexi=\i +\let\ptexlbrace=\{ +\let\ptexrbrace=\} +\let\ptexstar=\* +\let\ptext=\t + +% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo. +% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. +\let\+ = \relax + + +\message{Basics,} +\chardef\other=12 + +% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it +% starts a new line in the output. +\newlinechar = `^^J + +% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. +\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi +\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi +\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi +\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi +\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi +\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi +\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi +\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi +\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi +\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi +\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi +\ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined \gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}\fi +\ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}\fi + +% Ignore a token. +% +\def\gobble#1{} + +\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix} +\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers} +\hyphenation{eshell} +\hyphenation{white-space} + +% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. +\newdimen \bindingoffset +\newdimen \normaloffset +\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight + +% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file +% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, +% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. +% +\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% +\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined +\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2 + \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 + \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 + \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen +}% +\else +\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2 + \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 + \tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 + \tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1 + \tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2 + \showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen +}% +\fi + +% For @cropmarks command. +% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. +% +\newif\ifcropmarks +\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue +% +% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. +% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 +% +\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines +\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc +\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt +\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in + +% Main output routine. +\chardef\PAGE = 255 +\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} + +\newbox\headlinebox +\newbox\footlinebox + +% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents +% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. +\def\onepageout#1{% + \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi + % + \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset + \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi + % + % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in + % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). + \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% + \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% + % + {% + % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to + % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends + % before the \shipout runs. + % + \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. + \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. + \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if + % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. + \shipout\vbox{% + \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup + \hsize = \outerhsize + \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% + \nointerlineskip + \line{% + \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% + \hfill + \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% + }% + \vskip\topandbottommargin + \line\bgroup + \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. + \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi + \vbox\bgroup + \fi + % + \unvbox\headlinebox + \pagebody{#1}% + \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt + % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. + % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.) + % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. + \vskip 2\baselineskip + \unvbox\footlinebox + \fi + % + \ifcropmarks + \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup + \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup + \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill + \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick + \line{% + \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% + \hfill + \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% + }% + \nointerlineskip + \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% + \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause + \fi + }% end of \shipout\vbox + }% end of group with \turnoffactive + \advancepageno + \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi +} + +\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen + +\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} +{\catcode`\@ =11 +\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi +% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) +\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present + \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi +\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 +\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi +\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} +} + +% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are +% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize +% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) +% +\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} +\def\nstop{\vbox + {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} +\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} +\def\nsbot{\vbox + {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} + +% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of +% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a +% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. +% +\def\parsearg#1{% + \let\next = #1% + \begingroup + \obeylines + \futurelet\temp\parseargx +} + +% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or +% the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done. +\def\parseargx{% + % \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces. + \ifx\obeyedspace\temp + \expandafter\parseargdiscardspace + \else + \expandafter\parseargline + \fi +} + +% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call). +{\obeyspaces % + \gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}} + +{\obeylines % + \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% + \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. + % + % First remove any @c comment, then any @comment. + % Result of each macro is put in \toks0. + \argremovec #1\c\relax % + \expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax % + % + % Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg. + \expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}% + }% +} + +% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX +% do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call +% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is +% just to delimit the argument to the \c. +\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} +\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}} + +% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g., +% @end itemize @c foo +% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the +% `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the +% result to \toks0. +% +% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces +% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded. +% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever +% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed +% here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of +% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument +% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it. +% +\def\removeactivespaces#1{% + \begingroup + \ignoreactivespaces + \edef\temp{#1}% + \global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}% + \endgroup +} + +% Change the active space to expand to nothing. +% +\begingroup + \obeyspaces + \gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty} +\endgroup + + +\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} + +%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away +%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup) +\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi} +\def\ENVcheck{% +\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue} +\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage + +% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now. +\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} + +\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx} + +\def\beginxxx #1{% +\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax +{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else +\csname #1\endcsname\fi} + +% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. +% +\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx} +\def\endxxx #1{% + \removeactivespaces{#1}% + \edef\endthing{\the\toks0}% + % + \expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax + % There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo. + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}% + \else + \unmatchedenderror\endthing + \fi + \else + % Everything's ok; the right environment has been started. + \csname E\endthing\endcsname + \fi +} + +% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error. +% +\def\unmatchedenderror#1{% + \errhelp = \EMsimple + \errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}% +} + +% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error. +% +\def\defineunmatchedend#1{% + \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}% +} + + +% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in +% \nonfillstart and \quotations). +\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt +\def\singlespace{% + % Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below + % environments. --karl, 6may93 + %{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip + %\kern \baselineskip}% + \setleading \singlespaceskip +} + +%% Simple single-character @ commands + +% @@ prints an @ +% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). +\def\@{{\tt\char64}} + +% This is turned off because it was never documented +% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. +%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' +%% but suppressing ligatures. +%\def\`{{`}} +%\def\'{{'}} + +% Used to generate quoted braces. +\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} +\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} +\let\{=\mylbrace +\let\}=\myrbrace +\begingroup + % Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index. + \catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12 + \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 + \catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12 + @gdef@lbracecmd[\{]% + @gdef@rbracecmd[\}]% +@endgroup + +% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent +% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H. +\let\, = \c +\let\dotaccent = \. +\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} +\let\tieaccent = \t +\let\ubaraccent = \b +\let\udotaccent = \d + +% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown +% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss. +\def\questiondown{?`} +\def\exclamdown{!`} + +% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. +\def\imacro{i} +\def\jmacro{j} +\def\dotless#1{% + \def\temp{#1}% + \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi + \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j + \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% + \fi\fi +} + +% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space +% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space +% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and +% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the +% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. +{\catcode`@ = 11 + % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble + % if the definition is written into an index file. + \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M + \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } +} + +% @: forces normal size whitespace following. +\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } + +% @* forces a line break. +\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} + +% @. is an end-of-sentence period. +\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } + +% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. +\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } + +% @? is an end-of-sentence query. +\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } + +% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the +% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would +% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. +\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} + +% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing +% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box +% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for +% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is +% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, +% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and +% the text is small, which looks bad. +% +\def\group{\begingroup + \ifnum\catcode13=\active \else + \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp + \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% + \fi + % + % The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large + % depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the + % next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of + % the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space + % above. But it's pretty close. + \def\Egroup{% + \egroup % End the \vtop. + \endgroup % End the \group. + }% + % + \vtop\bgroup + % We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in + % the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it. + % Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group + % and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the + % strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself. + % Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line. + \everypar = {\strut}% + % + % Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's + % normal interline spacing. + \offinterlineskip + % + % OK, but now we have to do something about blank + % lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally + % just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've + % turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an + % empty paragraph. + \ifx\par\lisppar + \edef\par{\leavevmode \par}% + % + % Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par. + \obeylines + \fi + % + % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as + % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an + % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after + % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group + % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo + % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. + \comment +} +% +% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help +% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. +% +\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% +group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% +where each line of input produces a line of output.} + +% @need space-in-mils +% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. + +\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in + +\def\need{\parsearg\needx} + +% Old definition--didn't work. +%\def\needx #1{\par % +%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally +%% if the depth of the box does not fit. +%{\baselineskip=0pt% +%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak +%\prevdepth=-1000pt +%}} + +\def\needx#1{% + % Go into vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a + % paragraph. + \par + % + % Don't add any leading before our big empty box, but allow a page + % break, since the best break might be right here. + \allowbreak + \nointerlineskip + \vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}% + % + % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the + % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the + % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider + % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the + % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. + % + % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the + % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in + % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which + % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing + % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an + % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real + % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. + \penalty9999 + % + % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. + \kern -#1\mil + % + % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. + \nobreak +} + +% @br forces paragraph break + +\let\br = \par + +% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font. +% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter +% font as three actual period characters. +% +\def\dots{% + \leavevmode + \hbox to 1.5em{% + \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil + .\hss.\hss.% + \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil + }% +} + +% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. +% +\def\enddots{% + \leavevmode + \hbox to 2em{% + \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil + .\hss.\hss.\hss.% + \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil + }% + \spacefactor=3000 +} + + +% @page forces the start of a new page +% +\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} + +% @exdent text.... +% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin + +% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. +% That's how much \exdent should take out. +\newskip\exdentamount + +% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. +\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy} +\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} + +% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. +\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy} +\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount +\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} + +% @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph. + +\def\inmargin#1{% +\strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth + \vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss + \llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}} +\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm +\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} + +%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} + +% @include file insert text of that file as input. +% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name). +\def\include{\begingroup + \catcode`\\=12 + \catcode`~=12 + \catcode`^=12 + \catcode`_=12 + \catcode`|=12 + \catcode`<=12 + \catcode`>=12 + \catcode`+=12 + \parsearg\includezzz} +% Restore active chars for included file. +\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup + % Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work. + \def\thisfile{#1}% + \input\thisfile +\endgroup} + +\def\thisfile{} + +% @center line outputs that line, centered + +\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz} +\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip +\advance\hsize by -\rightskip +\centerline{#1}}} + +% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space + +\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx} +\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip} + +% @comment ...line which is ignored... +% @c is the same as @comment +% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment + +\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% +\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% +\commentxxx} +{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} + +\let\c=\comment + +% @paragraphindent is defined for the Info formatting commands only. +\let\paragraphindent=\comment + +% Prevent errors for section commands. +% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals. +\def\ignoresections{% +\let\chapter=\relax +\let\unnumbered=\relax +\let\top=\relax +\let\unnumberedsec=\relax +\let\unnumberedsection=\relax +\let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax +\let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax +\let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax +\let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax +\let\section=\relax +\let\subsec=\relax +\let\subsubsec=\relax +\let\subsection=\relax +\let\subsubsection=\relax +\let\appendix=\relax +\let\appendixsec=\relax +\let\appendixsection=\relax +\let\appendixsubsec=\relax +\let\appendixsubsection=\relax +\let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax +\let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax +\let\contents=\relax +\let\smallbook=\relax +\let\titlepage=\relax +} + +% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source +% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used +% incorrectly. +% +\def\ignoremorecommands{% + \let\defcodeindex = \relax + \let\defcv = \relax + \let\deffn = \relax + \let\deffnx = \relax + \let\defindex = \relax + \let\defivar = \relax + \let\defmac = \relax + \let\defmethod = \relax + \let\defop = \relax + \let\defopt = \relax + \let\defspec = \relax + \let\deftp = \relax + \let\deftypefn = \relax + \let\deftypefun = \relax + \let\deftypevar = \relax + \let\deftypevr = \relax + \let\defun = \relax + \let\defvar = \relax + \let\defvr = \relax + \let\ref = \relax + \let\xref = \relax + \let\printindex = \relax + \let\pxref = \relax + \let\settitle = \relax + \let\setchapternewpage = \relax + \let\setchapterstyle = \relax + \let\everyheading = \relax + \let\evenheading = \relax + \let\oddheading = \relax + \let\everyfooting = \relax + \let\evenfooting = \relax + \let\oddfooting = \relax + \let\headings = \relax + \let\include = \relax + \let\lowersections = \relax + \let\down = \relax + \let\raisesections = \relax + \let\up = \relax + \let\set = \relax + \let\clear = \relax + \let\item = \relax +} + +% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore. +% +\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} + +% Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text. +% +\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} +\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} +\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} +\def\html{\doignore{html}} +\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} +\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} + +% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file +% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. +\let\dircategory = \comment + +% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'. +% +\def\doignore#1{\begingroup + % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. + \ignoresections + % + % Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'. + % This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in + % this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match. + \long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}% + % + % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. + \catcode32 = 10 + % + % Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble. + \catcode`\{ = 9 + \catcode`\} = 9 + % + % We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence. + \catcode`\@ = 12 + % + % Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line + % will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example) + % @c @end ifinfo + % and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored. + % (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.) + \catcode`\c = 14 + % + % And now expand that command. + \doignoretext +} + +% What we do to finish off ignored text. +% +\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% + +\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse +\def\obstexwarn{% + \ifwarnedobs\relax\else + % We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0. + % This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines. + \immediate\write16{} + \immediate\write16{***WARNING*** for users of Unix TeX 3.0!} + \immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).} + \immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.} + \immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.} + \immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.} + \immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)} + \immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the} + \immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution} + \immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.} + \immediate\write16{} + \global\warnedobstrue + \fi +} + +% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a +% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed), +% uncomment the following line: +%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax + +% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for +% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command. +% +\def\nestedignore#1{% + \obstexwarn + % We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end + % command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the + % text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize + % the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on + % page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font. + % + \setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup + % Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer. + \ignoresections + % + % Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the + % @end command again. + \expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}% + % + % We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no + % trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do + % complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we + % undefine them. + % + % We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately; + % they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors. + \ignoremorecommands + % + % Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define + % all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use + % dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites + % might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still + % produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of + % stuff compared to the main input. + % + \nullfont + \let\tenrm = \nullfont \let\tenit = \nullfont \let\tensl = \nullfont + \let\tenbf = \nullfont \let\tentt = \nullfont \let\smallcaps = \nullfont + \let\tensf = \nullfont + % Similarly for index fonts (mostly for their use in + % smallexample) + \let\indrm = \nullfont \let\indit = \nullfont \let\indsl = \nullfont + \let\indbf = \nullfont \let\indtt = \nullfont \let\indsc = \nullfont + \let\indsf = \nullfont + % + % Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts. + \tracinglostchars = 0 + % + % Don't bother to do space factor calculations. + \frenchspacing + % + % Don't report underfull hboxes. + \hbadness = 10000 + % + % Do minimal line-breaking. + \pretolerance = 10000 + % + % Do not execute instructions in @tex + \def\tex{\doignore{tex}}% + % Do not execute macro definitions. + % `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off. + \def\macro{\doignore{ma}}% +} + +% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. +% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. +% +% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be +% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our +% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we +% didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid +% losing inside @example, for instance. +% +\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10 + \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR. + \parsearg\setxxx} +\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} +\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% + \def\temp{#2}% + \ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty + \else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. + \fi + \endgroup +} +% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or +% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into +% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'. +\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}} + +% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. +% +\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx} +\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax} + +% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. +% +{ + \catcode`\_ = \active + % + % We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if + % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any + % such active characters to their normal equivalents. + \gdef\value{\begingroup + \catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 + \indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore + \valuexxx} +} +\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} + +% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's +% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones +% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything +% about that. The command has to be fully expandable, since the result +% winds up in the index file. This means that if the variable's value +% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail +% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a +% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). +% +\def\expandablevalue#1{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax + {[No value for ``#1'']}% + \else + \csname SET#1\endcsname + \fi +} + +% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined +% with @set. +% +\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx} +\def\ifsetxxx #1{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\ifsetfail + \else + \expandafter\ifsetsucceed + \fi +} +\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}} +\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}} +\defineunmatchedend{ifset} + +% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been +% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. +% +\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx} +\def\ifclearxxx #1{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\ifclearsucceed + \else + \expandafter\ifclearfail + \fi +} +\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}} +\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}} +\defineunmatchedend{ifclear} + +% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text +% following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make `@end iftex' +% (etc.) valid only after an @iftex. +% +\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}} +\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}} +\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}} +\defineunmatchedend{iftex} +\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml} +\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo} + +% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it +% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no +% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must +% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't +% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since +% the @ifset might be nested.) +% +\def\conditionalsucceed#1{% + \edef\temp{% + % Remember the current value of \E#1. + \let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}% + % + % At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value. + \def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}% + }% + \temp +} + +% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the +% control sequences after we've constructed them. +% +\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} + +% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. +% +\def\asis#1{#1} + +% @math means output in math mode. +% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because control +% sequences like \math are expanded when the toc file is written. Then, +% we read the toc file back, the $'s will be normal characters (as they +% should be, according to the definition of Texinfo). So we must use a +% control sequence to switch into and out of math mode. +% +% This isn't quite enough for @math to work properly in indices, but it +% seems unlikely it will ever be needed there. +% +\let\implicitmath = $ +\def\math#1{\implicitmath #1\implicitmath} + +% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. +\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath} +\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath} + +% @refill is a no-op. +\let\refill=\relax + +% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to +% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. +% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). +% +\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. +\let\novalidate = \linksfalse + +% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. +% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. +% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. +\def\setfilename{% + \iflinks + \readauxfile + \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. + \openindices + \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. + \global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. + % + % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. + % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. + % Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input. + \openin 1 texinfo.cnf + \ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi + \closein1 + \temp + % + \comment % Ignore the actual filename. +} + +% Called from \setfilename. +% +\def\openindices{% + \newindex{cp}% + \newcodeindex{fn}% + \newcodeindex{vr}% + \newcodeindex{tp}% + \newcodeindex{ky}% + \newcodeindex{pg}% +} + +% @bye. +\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} + + +\message{fonts,} +% Font-change commands. + +% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. +% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc. +\newfam\sffam +\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf} +\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. + +% We don't need math for this one. +\def\ttsl{\tenttsl} + +% Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt). +\newcount\mainmagstep +\mainmagstep=\magstephalf + +% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the +% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). +% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor +\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} + +% Use cm as the default font prefix. +% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix +% before you read in texinfo.tex. +\ifx\fontprefix\undefined +\def\fontprefix{cm} +\fi +% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. +\def\rmshape{r} +\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold +\def\bfshape{b} +\def\bxshape{bx} +\def\ttshape{tt} +\def\ttbshape{tt} +\def\ttslshape{sltt} +\def\itshape{ti} +\def\itbshape{bxti} +\def\slshape{sl} +\def\slbshape{bxsl} +\def\sfshape{ss} +\def\sfbshape{ss} +\def\scshape{csc} +\def\scbshape{csc} + +\ifx\bigger\relax +\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1 +\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000} +\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000} +\else +\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} +\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} +\fi +% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10. +% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10 +% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10. +\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} +\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} +\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} +\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} +\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} +\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} +\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep +\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep + +% A few fonts for @defun, etc. +\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314 +\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} +\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} + +% Fonts for indices and small examples (9pt). +% We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic, +% because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that. +% Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they +% aren't very useful. +\setfont\ninett\ttshape{9}{1000} +\setfont\ninettsl\ttslshape{10}{900} +\setfont\indrm\rmshape{9}{1000} +\setfont\indit\itshape{9}{1000} +\setfont\indsl\slshape{9}{1000} +\let\indtt=\ninett +\let\indttsl=\ninettsl +\let\indsf=\indrm +\let\indbf=\indrm +\setfont\indsc\scshape{10}{900} +\font\indi=cmmi9 +\font\indsy=cmsy9 + +% Fonts for title page: +\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} +\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} +\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} +\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} +\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} +\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} +\let\titlebf=\titlerm +\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} +\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 +\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 +\def\authorrm{\secrm} + +% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). +\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} +\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} +\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} +\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} +\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} +\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} +\let\chapbf=\chaprm +\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} +\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 +\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 + +% Section fonts (14.4pt). +\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} +\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} +\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} +\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} +\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} +\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} +\let\secbf\secrm +\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} +\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 +\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 + +% \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} % This size an font looked bad. +% \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1} % The letters were too crowded. +% \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1} +% \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} +% \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1} + +%\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx. +%\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than +%\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315} % being scaled magstep1. +%\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315} +%\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315} + +%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm + +% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). +\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} +\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} +\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} +\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} +\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} +\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} +\let\ssecbf\ssecrm +\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1} +\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf +\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 +% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5, +% but that is not a standard magnification. + +% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, +% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since +% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we +% don't bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont (which would +% also require loading a lot more fonts). +% +\def\resetmathfonts{% + \textfont0 = \tenrm \textfont1 = \teni \textfont2 = \tensy + \textfont\itfam = \tenit \textfont\slfam = \tensl \textfont\bffam = \tenbf + \textfont\ttfam = \tentt \textfont\sffam = \tensf +} + + +% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead +% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work +% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most +% cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam +% \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to +% redefine \bf itself. +\def\textfonts{% + \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl + \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc + \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl + \resetmathfonts} +\def\titlefonts{% + \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl + \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc + \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy + \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl + \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} +\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} +\def\chapfonts{% + \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl + \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc + \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl + \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} +\def\secfonts{% + \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl + \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc + \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl + \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} +\def\subsecfonts{% + \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl + \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc + \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl + \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} +\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf? +\def\indexfonts{% + \let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl + \let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc + \let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \let\tenttsl=\indttsl + \resetmathfonts \setleading{12pt}} + +% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. +% +\textfonts + +% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. +\def\angleleft{$\langle$} +\def\angleright{$\rangle$} + +% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks +\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 + +% Fonts for short table of contents. +\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} +\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000} +\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} + +%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans +%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic + +% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction +% unless the following character is such as not to need one. +\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi} +\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} +\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} + +\let\i=\smartitalic +\let\var=\smartslanted +\let\dfn=\smartslanted +\let\emph=\smartitalic +\let\cite=\smartslanted + +\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} +\let\strong=\b + +% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at +% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the +% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. +% +\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} +\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } + +\def\t#1{% + {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% + \null +} +\let\ttfont=\t +\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} +\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{8}{1000} +\font\smallsy=cmsy9 +\def\key#1{{\smallrm\textfont2=\smallsy \leavevmode\hbox{% + \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% + \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt + \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% + \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% + \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} +% The old definition, with no lozenge: +%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} +\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} + +% @file, @option are the same as @samp. +\let\file=\samp +\let\option=\samp + +% @code is a modification of @t, +% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. +\def\tclose#1{% + {% + % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. + \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font + % + % Switch to typewriter. + \tt + % + % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. + \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% + % + % Turn off hyphenation. + \nohyphenation + % + \rawbackslash + \frenchspacing + #1% + }% + \null +} + +% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code. +% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes +% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. + +% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control +% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. +% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) +% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. +% -- rms. +{ + \catcode`\-=\active + \catcode`\_=\active + % + \global\def\code{\begingroup + \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash + \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder + \codex + } + % + % If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index, + % just treat them as a normal -. + \global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash} +} + +\def\realdash{-} +\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} +\def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}} +\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} + +%\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary + +% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, +% then @kbd has no effect. + +% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), +% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), +% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). +\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx} +\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{% + \def\arg{#1}% + \ifx\arg\worddistinct + \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% + \else\ifx\arg\wordexample + \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% + \else\ifx\arg\wordcode + \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% + \fi\fi\fi +} +\def\worddistinct{distinct} +\def\wordexample{example} +\def\wordcode{code} + +% Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro, +% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.) +\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl} + +\def\xkey{\key} +\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% +\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% +\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi +\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} + +% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. +\let\url=\code +\let\env=\code +\let\command=\code + +% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional second argument +% specifying the text to display. First (mandatory) arg is the url. +% Perhaps eventually put in a hypertex \special here. +% +\def\uref#1{\urefxxx #1,,\finish} +\def\urefxxx#1,#2,#3\finish{% + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% + \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt + \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% + \else + \code{#1}% + \fi +} + +% rms does not like the angle brackets --karl, 17may97. +% So now @email is just like @uref. +%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} +\let\email=\uref + +% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the +% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and +% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have +% this property, we can check that font parameter. +% +\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } + +% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the +% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. +% +\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} + +\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} + +% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', +% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for +% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. +%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} + +% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. +\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font +\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font +\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font + +% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps. +\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}} + +% @pounds{} is a sterling sign. +\def\pounds{{\it\$}} + + +\message{page headings,} + +\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in +\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc + +% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. +\newif\ifseenauthor +\newif\iffinishedtitlepage + +% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the +% user says @contentsaftertitlepage or @shortcontentsaftertitlepage. +% +\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage + \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue +\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage + \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue + +\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz} +\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% + \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} + +\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts + \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm + \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}% + % + \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}% + % + % Leave some space at the very top of the page. + \vglue\titlepagetopglue + % + % Now you can print the title using @title. + \def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}% + \def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1} + % print a rule at the page bottom also. + \finishedtitlepagefalse + \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}% + % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. + \finishedtitlepagetrue + % + % Now you can put text using @subtitle. + \def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}% + \def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}% + % + % @author should come last, but may come many times. + \def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}% + \def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi + {\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}% + % + % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space + % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. + \let\oldpage = \page + \def\page{% + \iffinishedtitlepage\else + \finishtitlepage + \fi + \oldpage + \let\page = \oldpage + \hbox{}}% +% \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}} +} + +\def\Etitlepage{% + \iffinishedtitlepage\else + \finishtitlepage + \fi + % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, + % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. + % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page + % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. + \oldpage + \endgroup + % + % If they want short, they certainly want long too. + \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage + \shortcontents + \contents + \global\let\shortcontents = \relax + \global\let\contents = \relax + \fi + % + \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage + \contents + \global\let\contents = \relax + \global\let\shortcontents = \relax + \fi + % + \HEADINGSon +} + +\def\finishtitlepage{% + \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize + \vskip\titlepagebottomglue + \finishedtitlepagetrue +} + +%%% Set up page headings and footings. + +\let\thispage=\folio + +\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages +\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages +\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages +\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages + +% Now make Tex use those variables +\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline + \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} +\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline + \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} +\let\HEADINGShook=\relax + +% Commands to set those variables. +% For example, this is what @headings on does +% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter +% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle +% @evenfooting @thisfile|| +% @oddfooting ||@thisfile + +\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} +\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} +\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx} + +\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} +\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} +\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx} + +{\catcode`\@=0 % + +\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} +\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% +\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} + +\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} +\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% +\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} + +\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% + +\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} +\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% +\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} + +\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} +\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% + \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% + % + % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume + % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. + \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip + \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip +} + +\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} +% +}% unbind the catcode of @. + +% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. +% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. +% @headings off turns them off. +% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. +% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. +% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. +% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. +% By default, they are off at the start of a document, +% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. + +\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} + +\def\HEADINGSoff{ +\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} +\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} +\HEADINGSoff +% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. +% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, +% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document +% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top +% edge of all pages. +\def\HEADINGSdouble{ +\global\pageno=1 +\global\evenfootline={\hfil} +\global\oddfootline={\hfil} +\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage +} +\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager + +% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, +% page number on top right. +\def\HEADINGSsingle{ +\global\pageno=1 +\global\evenfootline={\hfil} +\global\oddfootline={\hfil} +\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager +} +\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} + +\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} +\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter +\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% +\global\evenfootline={\hfil} +\global\oddfootline={\hfil} +\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage +} + +\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} +\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% +\global\evenfootline={\hfil} +\global\oddfootline={\hfil} +\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager +} + +% Subroutines used in generating headings +% Produces Day Month Year style of output. +\def\today{\number\day\space +\ifcase\month\or +January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or +July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi +\space\number\year} + +% Use this if you want the Month Day, Year style of output. +%\def\today{\ifcase\month\or +%January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or +%July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi +%\space\number\day, \number\year} + +% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings +% It generates no output of its own + +\def\thistitle{No Title} +\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz} +\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}} + + +\message{tables,} +% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x). + +% default indentation of table text +\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in +% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text +\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in +% margin between end of table item and start of table text. +\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in + +% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin +\newdimen\itemmax + +% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with +% these defs. +% They also define \itemindex +% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). + +\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip + +\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} + +\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} +\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} + +\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz} +\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz} + +\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz} +\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz} + +\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}% + \itemzzz {#1}} + +\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}% + \itemzzz {#1}} + +\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % + \advance\hsize by -\rightskip + \advance\hsize by -\tableindent + \setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}% + \itemindex{#1}% + \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. + % + % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line + % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that + % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next + % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the + % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. + \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax + % + % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, + % but leave it ragged-right. + \begingroup + \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent + \advance\hsize by\tableindent + \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil + \leavevmode\unhbox0\par + \endgroup + % + % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the + % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. + \nobreak \vskip-\parskip + % + % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately + % we can't prevent a possible page break at the following + % \baselineskip glue. + \nobreak + \endgroup + \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse + \else + % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the + % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. + \noindent + % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in + % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and + % eventually be printed. + \nobreak\kern-\tableindent + \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 + \unhbox0 + \nobreak\kern\dimen0 + \endgroup + \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue + \fi +} + +\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}} +\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}} +\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}} +\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}} +\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}} +\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}} + +% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work. +\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}} + +% @table, @ftable, @vtable. +\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex} +{\obeylines\obeyspaces% +\gdef\tablex #1^^M{% +\tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}} + +\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex} +{\obeylines\obeyspaces% +\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{% +\tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley +\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% +\let\Etable=\relax}} + +\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex} +{\obeylines\obeyspaces% +\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{% +\tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley +\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% +\let\Etable=\relax}} + +\def\dontindex #1{} +\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}% +\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}% + +{\obeyspaces % +\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup% +\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}} + +\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{% +\aboveenvbreak % +\begingroup % +\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge. +\let\itemindex=#1% +\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi % +\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi % +\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi % +\def\itemfont{#2}% +\itemmax=\tableindent % +\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % +\advance \leftskip by \tableindent % +\exdentamount=\tableindent +\parindent = 0pt +\parskip = \smallskipamount +\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% +\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% +\let\item = \internalBitem % +\let\itemx = \internalBitemx % +\let\kitem = \internalBkitem % +\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx % +\let\xitem = \internalBxitem % +\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx % +} + +% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize + +\newcount \itemno + +\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz} + +\def\itemizezzz #1{% + \begingroup % ended by the @end itemize + \itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize} +} + +\def\itemizey #1#2{% +\aboveenvbreak % +\itemmax=\itemindent % +\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin % +\advance \leftskip by \itemindent % +\exdentamount=\itemindent +\parindent = 0pt % +\parskip = \smallskipamount % +\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi% +\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% +\def\itemcontents{#1}% +\let\item=\itemizeitem} + +% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. +% These are `.?!:;,' +\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000 + \sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 } + +% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in +% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. +% +\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% + +% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, +% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No +% argument is the same as `1'. +% +\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz} +\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} +\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% + \begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate + % + % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. + \def\thearg{#1}% + \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi + % + % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a + % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. + % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. + % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at + % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) + \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark + \ifx\rest\empty + % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. + % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. + % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and + % not equal to itself. + % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. + % + % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from + % continuing to look for a . + % + \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax + \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) + \else + % It's a letter. + \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax + \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter + \else + \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter + \fi + \fi + \else + % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. + \numericenumerate + \fi +} + +% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is +% given in \thearg. +% +\def\numericenumerate{% + \itemno = \thearg + \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% +} + +% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. +\def\lowercaseenumerate{% + \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg + \startenumeration{% + % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. + \ifnum\itemno=0 + \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger + alphabet}% + \fi + \char\lccode\itemno + }% +} + +% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. +\def\uppercaseenumerate{% + \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg + \startenumeration{% + % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. + \ifnum\itemno=0 + \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger + alphabet} + \fi + \char\uccode\itemno + }% +} + +% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the +% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in +% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. +% +\def\startenumeration#1{% + \advance\itemno by -1 + \itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr +} + +% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg +% to @enumerate. +% +\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} +\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} +\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} +\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} + +% Definition of @item while inside @itemize. + +\def\itemizeitem{% +\advance\itemno by 1 +{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% +\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi +{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt +\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}% +\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% +\flushcr} + +% @multitable macros +% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 +% +% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. +% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width +% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, +% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. + +% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. + +% To make preamble: +% +% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: +% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 +% @item ... +% +% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total +% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many +% columns as desired. + + +% Or use a template: +% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} +% @item ... +% using the widest term desired in each column. +% +% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in +% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it +% will parse correctly, i.e., +% +% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 +% template} +% Not: +% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} +% {Column 3 template} + +% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column +% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's +% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, +% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. + +% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their +% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are. + +% Sample multitable: + +% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} +% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col +% @item +% first col stuff +% @tab +% second col stuff +% @tab +% third col +% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff +% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. +% +% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. +% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. +% @end multitable + +% Default dimensions may be reset by user. +% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. +% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. +% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. +% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline +% to baseline. +% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. +% +\newskip\multitableparskip +\newskip\multitableparindent +\newdimen\multitablecolspace +\newskip\multitablelinespace +\multitableparskip=0pt +\multitableparindent=6pt +\multitablecolspace=12pt +\multitablelinespace=0pt + +% Macros used to set up halign preamble: +% +\let\endsetuptable\relax +\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} +\let\columnfractions\relax +\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} +\newif\ifsetpercent + +% 2/1/96, to allow fractions to be given with more than one digit. +\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {\global\advance\colcount by1 % +\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#1\hsize}% +\setuptable} + +\newcount\colcount +\def\setuptable#1{\def\firstarg{#1}% +\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable\let\go\relax% +\else + \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions\global\setpercenttrue% + \else + \ifsetpercent + \let\go\pickupwholefraction % In this case arg of setuptable + % is the decimal point before the + % number given in percent of hsize. + % We don't need this so we don't use it. + \else + \global\advance\colcount by1 + \setbox0=\hbox{#1 }% Add a normal word space as a separator; + % typically that is always in the input, anyway. + \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% + \fi% + \fi% +\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction\else\let\go\setuptable\fi% +\fi\go} + +% multitable syntax +\def\tab{&\hskip1sp\relax} % 2/2/96 + % tiny skip here makes sure this column space is + % maintained, even if it is never used. + +% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: + +\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable} +\def\dotable#1{\bgroup + \vskip\parskip + \let\item\crcr + \tolerance=9500 + \hbadness=9500 + \setmultitablespacing + \parskip=\multitableparskip + \parindent=\multitableparindent + \overfullrule=0pt + \global\colcount=0 + \def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}% + % + % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: + \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable + % + % \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of + % each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one. + % The table preamble + % looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width. + \everycr{\noalign{% + % + % \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. + % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table + % breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem + % manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. + \global\colcount=0\relax}}% + % + % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will + % be used as many times as user calls for columns. + % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and + % continue for many paragraphs if desired. + \halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax + \multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname + % + % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other + % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after + % the first one. + % + % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace + % to the width of each template entry. + % + % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will + % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip + % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at + % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. + % + % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. + \rightskip=0pt + \ifnum\colcount=1 + % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. + \advance\hsize by\leftskip + \else + \ifsetpercent \else + % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize + % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. + \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace + \fi + % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: + \leftskip=\multitablecolspace + \fi + % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious + % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the + % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. + % For example: + % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 + % @item @code{#} + % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. + % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking + % characters. + \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr +} + +\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace. +% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on +% current baselineskip. +\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt +%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders, +%% to keep lines equally spaced +\let\multistrut = \strut +%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of +%% table. If not, do nothing. +%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. +\else +\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0 +width0pt\relax} \fi +\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace +\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace +\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller + %% than skip between lines in the table. +\fi% +\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt +\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace +\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller + %% than skip between lines in the table. +\fi} + + +\message{indexing,} +% Index generation facilities + +% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite +% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex. +{\catcode`\@=11 +\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}} + +% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. +% It automatically defines \fooindex such that +% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. +% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for +% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. +% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long +% for the sake of vms. +% +\def\newindex#1{% + \iflinks + \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname + \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file + \fi + \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index + \noexpand\doindex{#1}} +} + +% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} + +\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} + +% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. + +\def\newcodeindex#1{% + \iflinks + \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname + \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 + \fi + \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% + \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}} +} + +\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} + +% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. +% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. +% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the +% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. +\def\synindex#1 #2 {% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname + \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname + \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo + \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex + \noexpand\doindex{#2}}% +} + +% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo +% inside @code. +\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname + \expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname + \expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo + \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex + \noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}% +} + +% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. +% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, +% and it is "foo", the name of the index. + +% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. +% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. + +% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} +% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. + +\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} +\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} + +% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. +\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} +\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} + +\def\indexdummies{% +\def\ { }% +% Take care of the plain tex accent commands. +\def\"{\realbackslash "}% +\def\`{\realbackslash `}% +\def\'{\realbackslash '}% +\def\^{\realbackslash ^}% +\def\~{\realbackslash ~}% +\def\={\realbackslash =}% +\def\b{\realbackslash b}% +\def\c{\realbackslash c}% +\def\d{\realbackslash d}% +\def\u{\realbackslash u}% +\def\v{\realbackslash v}% +\def\H{\realbackslash H}% +% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. +\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}% +\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}% +\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}% +\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}% +\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}% +\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}% +\def\o{\realbackslash o}% +\def\O{\realbackslash O}% +\def\l{\realbackslash l}% +\def\L{\realbackslash L}% +\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}% +% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry. +% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to +% laboriously list every single command here.) +\def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char. +%\let\{ = \lbracecmd +%\let\} = \rbracecmd +\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}% +\def\w{\realbackslash w }% +\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }% +%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }% +\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }% +\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}% +\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}% +\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}% +\def\less{\realbackslash less}% +\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}% +\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}% +\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }% +\def\result{\realbackslash result}% +\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}% +\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}% +\def\print{\realbackslash print}% +\def\error{\realbackslash error}% +\def\point{\realbackslash point}% +\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}% +\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}% +\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}% +\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}% +\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}% +\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}% +\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}% +\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}% +\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}% +\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}% +\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}% +\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}% +\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% +\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}% +\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}% +\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}% +\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}% +\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}% +\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}% +\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}% +\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}% +\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}% +\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}% +\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}% +% +% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not +% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any +% (non-fully-expandable) commands. +\let\value = \expandablevalue +% +\unsepspaces +} + +% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces +% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the +% expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). +{\obeyspaces + \gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}} + +% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands. +% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by. +\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1} +\def\indexdummytex{TeX} +\def\indexdummydots{...} + +\def\indexnofonts{% +% Just ignore accents. +\let\,=\indexdummyfont +\let\"=\indexdummyfont +\let\`=\indexdummyfont +\let\'=\indexdummyfont +\let\^=\indexdummyfont +\let\~=\indexdummyfont +\let\==\indexdummyfont +\let\b=\indexdummyfont +\let\c=\indexdummyfont +\let\d=\indexdummyfont +\let\u=\indexdummyfont +\let\v=\indexdummyfont +\let\H=\indexdummyfont +\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont +% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. +\def\oe{oe}% +\def\ae{ae}% +\def\aa{aa}% +\def\OE{OE}% +\def\AE{AE}% +\def\AA{AA}% +\def\o{o}% +\def\O{O}% +\def\l{l}% +\def\L{L}% +\def\ss{ss}% +\let\w=\indexdummyfont +\let\t=\indexdummyfont +\let\r=\indexdummyfont +\let\i=\indexdummyfont +\let\b=\indexdummyfont +\let\emph=\indexdummyfont +\let\strong=\indexdummyfont +\let\cite=\indexdummyfont +\let\sc=\indexdummyfont +%Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command +% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |... +%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont +\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont +\let\code=\indexdummyfont +\let\url=\indexdummyfont +\let\uref=\indexdummyfont +\let\env=\indexdummyfont +\let\command=\indexdummyfont +\let\option=\indexdummyfont +\let\file=\indexdummyfont +\let\samp=\indexdummyfont +\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont +\let\key=\indexdummyfont +\let\var=\indexdummyfont +\let\TeX=\indexdummytex +\let\dots=\indexdummydots +\def\@{@}% +} + +% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape. +% We must first make another character (@) an escape +% so we do not become unable to do a definition. + +{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other + @gdef@realbackslash{\}} + +\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. +\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? + +% For \ifx comparisons. +\def\emptymacro{\empty} + +% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. +% +\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty} + +% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. +% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- +% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception +% is with defuns, which call us directly. +% +\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% + % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. + \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else + \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}% + \fi + {% + \count255=\lastpenalty + {% + \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage + \escapechar=`\\ + {% + \let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio. + \def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now + % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. + % + \def\thirdarg{#3}% + % + % If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key. + \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro + \let\subentry = \empty + \else + \def\subentry{ #3}% + \fi + % + % First process the index-string with all font commands turned off + % to get the string to sort by. + {\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}% + % + % Now produce the complete index entry, with both the sort key and the + % original text, including any font commands. + \toks0 = {#2}% + \edef\temp{% + \write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{% + \realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}% + }% + % + % If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index string. + \ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else + \toks0 = {#3}% + \edef\temp{\temp{\the\toks0}}% + \fi + % + % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it + % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting + % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the + % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences + % like this: + % @end defun + % @tindex whatever + % @defun ... + % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the + % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of + % the previous defun. + % + % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We + % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. + % + % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. + % + \iflinks + \ifvmode + \skip0 = \lastskip + \ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi + \fi + % + \temp % do the write + % + % + \ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi + \fi + }% + }% + \penalty\count255 + }% +} + +% The index entry written in the file actually looks like +% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} +% or +% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} +% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files +% containing these kinds of lines: +% \initial {c} +% before the first topic whose initial is c +% \entry {topic}{pagelist} +% for a topic that is used without subtopics +% \primary {topic} +% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics +% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} +% for each subtopic. + +% Define the user-accessible indexing commands +% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. + +\def\findex {\fnindex} +\def\kindex {\kyindex} +\def\cindex {\cpindex} +\def\vindex {\vrindex} +\def\tindex {\tpindex} +\def\pindex {\pgindex} + +\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} +{\obeylines % +\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % +\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} + +% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. + +% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. +% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). +% +\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex} +\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup + \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% + % + \indexfonts \rm + \tolerance = 9500 + \indexbreaks + % + % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. + % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains + % \initial {@} + % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces + % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). + \catcode`\@ = 11 + \openin 1 \jobname.#1s + \ifeof 1 + % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, + % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the + % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure + % there is some text. + (Index is nonexistent) + \else + % + % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof + % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so + % it can discover if there is anything in it. + \read 1 to \temp + \ifeof 1 + (Index is empty) + \else + % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape + % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change + % to make right now. + \def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}% + \catcode`\\ = 0 + \escapechar = `\\ + \begindoublecolumns + \input \jobname.#1s + \enddoublecolumns + \fi + \fi + \closein 1 +\endgroup} + +% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. +% Change them to control the appearance of the index. + +\def\initial#1{{% + % Some minor font changes for the special characters. + \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt + % + % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. + \removelastskip + % + % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. + \penalty -300 + % + % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of + % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column + % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch + % we need before each entry, but it's better. + % + % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. + \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip + \leftline{\secbf #1}% + \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip + % + % Do our best not to break after the initial. + \nobreak +}} + +% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2 +% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents +% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. +% +\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup + % + % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't + % affect previous text. + \par + % + % Do not fill out the last line with white space. + \parfillskip = 0in + % + % No extra space above this paragraph. + \parskip = 0in + % + % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. + \finalhyphendemerits = 0 + % + % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number + % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the + % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large + % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across + % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. + % + % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start + % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. + \hangindent = 2em + % + % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line + % with blank space. + \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil + % + % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns. + \vskip 0pt plus1pt + % + % Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking + % parameters we've set above will have an effect. + \noindent + % + % Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it. + #1% + % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if + % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be + % cursed by a Unix daemon. + \def\tempa{{\rm }}% + \def\tempb{#2}% + \edef\tempc{\tempa}% + \edef\tempd{\tempb}% + \ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else% + % + % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out + % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the + % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) + \hfil\penalty50 + \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. + % + % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as + % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull + % \hbox ensues. + \ #2% The page number ends the paragraph. + \fi% + \par +\endgroup} + +% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. +\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders + \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} + +\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} + +\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm + +\def\secondary #1#2{ +{\parfillskip=0in \parskip=0in +\hangindent =1in \hangafter=1 +\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par +}} + +% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. +% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, +% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. +\catcode`\@=11 + +\newbox\partialpage +\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize + +\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns + % Grab any single-column material above us. + \output = {\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% + % + % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a + % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output + % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is + % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In + % that case, we must prevent the second \partialpage from + % simply overwriting the first, causing us to lose the page. + % This will preserve it until a real output routine can ship it + % out. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this runs and + % this will be a no-op. + \unvbox\partialpage + % + % Unvbox the main output page. + \unvbox255 + \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip + }}% + \eject + % + % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. + \output = {\doublecolumnout}% + % + % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this + % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 + % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple + % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the + % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. + % + % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between + % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it + % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant + % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) + % as it did when we hard-coded it. + % + % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we + % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) + % been clobbered. + % + \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize + \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize + \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 + \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize + % + % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, + % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) + \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage + \vsize = 2\vsize +} + +% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except +% the last. +% +\def\doublecolumnout{% + \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth + % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal + % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the + % previous page. + \dimen@ = \vsize + \divide\dimen@ by 2 + % + % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. + \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ + \onepageout\pagesofar + \unvbox255 + \penalty\outputpenalty +} +\def\pagesofar{% + % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, + % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. + \advance\vsize by \ht\partialpage + \unvbox\partialpage + % + \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize + \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize + \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% +} +\def\enddoublecolumns{% + \output = {% + % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave on the + % current page, no automatic page break. + \balancecolumns + % + % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, + % though, there will be another page break right after this \output + % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not + % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal + % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be + % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes + % the output somewhat more palatable.) + \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% + % + % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted + % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column + % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize. + \pagegoal = \vsize + }% + \eject + \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns +} +\def\balancecolumns{% + % Called at the end of the double column material. + \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. + \dimen@ = \ht0 + \advance\dimen@ by \topskip + \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip + \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to + %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% + \splittopskip = \topskip + % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. + {% + \vbadness = 10000 + \loop + \global\setbox3 = \copy0 + \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ + \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ + \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt + \repeat + }% + %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% + \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% + \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% + % + \pagesofar +} +\catcode`\@ = \other + + +\message{sectioning,} +% Define chapters, sections, etc. + +\newcount\chapno +\newcount\secno \secno=0 +\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 +\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 + +% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... +\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ +\def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} + +% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. +% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise. +\def\thischapter{} +\def\thissection{} + +\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level +\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count + +% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. +\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} +\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name + +% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. +\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} +\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name + +% Choose a numbered-heading macro +% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections +% #2 is text for heading +\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 +\ifcase\absseclevel + \chapterzzz{#2} +\or + \seczzz{#2} +\or + \numberedsubseczzz{#2} +\or + \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} +\else + \ifnum \absseclevel<0 + \chapterzzz{#2} + \else + \numberedsubsubseczzz{#2} + \fi +\fi +} + +% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels +\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 +\ifcase\absseclevel + \appendixzzz{#2} +\or + \appendixsectionzzz{#2} +\or + \appendixsubseczzz{#2} +\or + \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} +\else + \ifnum \absseclevel<0 + \appendixzzz{#2} + \else + \appendixsubsubseczzz{#2} + \fi +\fi +} + +% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels +\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1 +\ifcase\absseclevel + \unnumberedzzz{#2} +\or + \unnumberedseczzz{#2} +\or + \unnumberedsubseczzz{#2} +\or + \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} +\else + \ifnum \absseclevel<0 + \unnumberedzzz{#2} + \else + \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2} + \fi +\fi +} + +% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. +\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title} +\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy} +\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz +\def\chapterzzz #1{% +\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 +\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% +\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}% +\gdef\thissection{#1}% +\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% +% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter +% because we don't want its macros evaluated now. +\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}% + {\the\chapno}}}% +\temp +\donoderef +\global\let\section = \numberedsec +\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec +\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec +} + +\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy} +\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz +\def\appendixzzz #1{% +\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 +\global\advance \appendixno by 1 +\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% +\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}% +\gdef\thissection{#1}% +\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% +\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}% + {\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}% +\temp +\appendixnoderef +\global\let\section = \appendixsec +\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec +\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec +} + +% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. +\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy} +\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}} + +% @top is like @unnumbered. +\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} + +\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} +\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz +\def\unnumberedzzz #1{% +\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 +% +% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the +% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX +% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX +% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant +% to be executed, not expanded). +% +% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear +% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use +% \the to achieve this: TeX expands \the only once, +% simply yielding the contents of . (We also do this for +% the toc entries.) +\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}% +% +\unnumbchapmacro {#1}% +\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}% +\temp +\unnumbnoderef +\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec +\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec +\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec +} + +% Sections. +\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy} +\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz +\def\seczzz #1{% +\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % +\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}% + {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}% +\temp +\donoderef +\nobreak +} + +\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} +\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} +\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz +\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{% +\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % +\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}% + {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}% +\temp +\appendixnoderef +\nobreak +} + +\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy} +\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz +\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{% +\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}% +\temp +\unnumbnoderef +\nobreak +} + +% Subsections. +\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy} +\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz +\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{% +\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % +\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}% + {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}% +\temp +\donoderef +\nobreak +} + +\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy} +\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz +\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{% +\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % +\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}% + {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}% +\temp +\appendixnoderef +\nobreak +} + +\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy} +\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz +\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{% +\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry% + {\the\toks0}}}% +\temp +\unnumbnoderef +\nobreak +} + +% Subsubsections. +\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy} +\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz +\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{% +\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % +\subsubsecheading {#1} + {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}% + {\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}% +\temp +\donoderef +\nobreak +} + +\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy} +\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz +\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{% +\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % +\subsubsecheading {#1} + {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}% + {\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}% +\temp +\appendixnoderef +\nobreak +} + +\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy} +\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz +\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{% +\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% +\toks0 = {#1}% +\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry% + {\the\toks0}}}% +\temp +\unnumbnoderef +\nobreak +} + +% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo. +% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work. +\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} +\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz} +\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz} +\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz} +\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz} + +\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz} +\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz} +\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz} +\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz} + +\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz} +\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz} +\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz} +\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz} + +% These macros control what the section commands do, according +% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). +% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. +\global\let\section = \numberedsec +\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec +\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec + +% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading + +% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: +% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit +% overlong headings to fold. +% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a +% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. +% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and +% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. + + +\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz} +\def\majorheadingzzz #1{% +{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% +{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 + \parindent=0pt\raggedright + \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} + +\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz} +\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak % +{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 + \parindent=0pt\raggedright + \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} + +% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. +\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading} +\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading} +\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading} + +% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only +% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), +% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. + +%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) +\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} + +\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} + +%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it +% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) + +\newskip\chapheadingskip + +\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} +\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} +\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} + +\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} + +\def\CHAPPAGoff{% +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager +\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak +\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} + +\def\CHAPPAGon{% +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager +\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager +\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager +\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} + +\def\CHAPPAGodd{ +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage +\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage +\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage +\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} + +\CHAPPAGon + +\def\CHAPFplain{ +\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain +\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain +\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain} + +% Plain chapter opening. +% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered. +\def\chfplain#1#2{% + \pchapsepmacro + {% + \chapfonts \rm + \def\chapnum{#2}% + \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% + \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright + \hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe + \unhbox0 #1\par}% + }% + \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title + \nobreak +} + +% Plain opening for unnumbered. +\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}} + +% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. +\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax +\def\centerchfplain#1{{% + \def\centerparametersmaybe{% + \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip + \leftskip = \rightskip + \parfillskip = 0pt + }% + \chfplain{#1}{}% +}} + +\CHAPFplain % The default + +\def\unnchfopen #1{% +\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 + \parindent=0pt\raggedright + \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak +} + +\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts +\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% +\par\penalty 5000 % +} + +\def\centerchfopen #1{% +\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 + \parindent=0pt + \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak +} + +\def\CHAPFopen{ +\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen +\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen +\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} + + +% Section titles. +\newskip\secheadingskip +\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}} +\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}} +\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}} + +% Subsection titles. +\newskip \subsecheadingskip +\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}} +\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}} +\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}} + +% Subsubsection titles. +\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip +\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak +\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}} +\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}} + + +% Print any size section title. +% +% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section +% number (maybe empty), #3 the text. +\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{% + {% + \expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip + \csname #1headingbreak\endcsname + }% + {% + % Switch to the right set of fonts. + \csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm + % + % Only insert the separating space if we have a section number. + \def\secnum{#2}% + \setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% + % + \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright + \hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number + \unhbox0 #3}% + }% + \ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak +} + + +\message{toc,} +\newwrite\tocfile + +% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. +% Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the +% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro. +% +% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other +% given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere. +% +\newif\iftocfileopened +\def\writetocentry#1{% + \iftocfileopened\else + \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc + \global\tocfileopenedtrue + \fi + \iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi +} + +\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in +\newcount\savepageno +\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 + +% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written +% to \tocfile. +% +\def\startcontents#1{% + % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should + % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain + % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. + % From: Torbjorn Granlund + \contentsalignmacro + \immediate\closeout\tocfile + % + % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. + % It is abundantly clear what they are. + \unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}% + \savepageno = \pageno + \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. + \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 + % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section + % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97. + %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi + \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. + \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. + % + % Roman numerals for page numbers. + \ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi +} + + +% Normal (long) toc. +\def\contents{% + \startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}% + \openin 1 \jobname.toc + \ifeof 1 \else + \closein 1 + \input \jobname.toc + \fi + \vfill \eject + \endgroup + \lastnegativepageno = \pageno + \pageno = \savepageno +} + +% And just the chapters. +\def\summarycontents{% + \startcontents{\putwordShortContents}% + % + \let\chapentry = \shortchapentry + \let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry + % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. + \secfonts + \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl + \rm + \hyphenpenalty = 10000 + \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. + \def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{} + \def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{} + \def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{} + \def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} + \def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{} + \def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} + \openin 1 \jobname.toc + \ifeof 1 \else + \closein 1 + \input \jobname.toc + \fi + \vfill \eject + \endgroup + \lastnegativepageno = \pageno + \pageno = \savepageno +} +\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents + +% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. +% The first argument is the chapter or section name. +% The last argument is the page number. +% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... + +% Chapter-level things, for both the long and short contents. +\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}} + +% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings +\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{% + \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno{#3}}% +} + +% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. +% The arg is, e.g. `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. +% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry +% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry +% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it. +\setbox0 = \hbox{\shortcontrm \putwordAppendix } +\newdimen\shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth = \wd0 + +\def\shortchaplabel#1{% + % We typeset #1 in a box of constant width, regardless of the text of + % #1, so the chapter titles will come out aligned. + \setbox0 = \hbox{#1}% + \dimen0 = \ifdim\wd0 > \shortappendixwidth \shortappendixwidth \else 0pt \fi + % + % This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the + % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. + % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after + % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) + \advance\dimen0 by 1.1em + \hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}% +} + +\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}} +\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno{#2}}} + +% Sections. +\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}} +\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2{\dosecentry{#1}{#2}} + +% Subsections. +\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}} +\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#2}} + +% And subsubsections. +\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}} +\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}} + +% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. +\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc + +% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the +% page number. +% +% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters +% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. +\def\dochapentry#1#2{% + \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip + \begingroup + \chapentryfonts + \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% + \endgroup + \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip +} + +\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup + \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent + \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% +\endgroup} + +\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup + \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent + \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% +\endgroup} + +\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup + \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent + \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% +\endgroup} + +% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for +% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We +% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist +% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.) +\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup + \vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks + % Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is + % typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we + % have to do the usual translation tricks. + \entry{#1}{#2}% +\endgroup} + +% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. +\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} + +\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} +\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} + +\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} +\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} +\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts +\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts + + +\message{environments,} + +% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of +% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. +% Furthermore, these definitions must come after we define our fonts. +\newbox\dblarrowbox \newbox\longdblarrowbox +\newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox +\newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox + +%{\tentt +%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil} +%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil} +%\global\setbox\pushcharbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil} +%\global\setbox\equivbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil} +% Adapted from the manmac format (p.420 of TeXbook) +%\global\setbox\bullbox = \hbox to 1em{\kern.15em\vrule height .75ex width .85ex +% depth .1ex\hfil} +%} + +% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. +\def\point{$\star$} +\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} +\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} +\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} +\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} + +% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. +{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. +\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules +% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) +\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} + +\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil + \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. + \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. + \vbox{ + \hrule height\dimen2 + \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. + \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. + \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. + \hrule height\dimen2} + \hfil} + +% The @error{} command. +\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} + +% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. +% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. +% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. + +\def\tex{\begingroup + \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 + \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 + \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie + \catcode `\%=14 + \catcode 43=12 % plus + \catcode`\"=12 + \catcode`\==12 + \catcode`\|=12 + \catcode`\<=12 + \catcode`\>=12 + \escapechar=`\\ + % + \let\b=\ptexb + \let\bullet=\ptexbullet + \let\c=\ptexc + \let\,=\ptexcomma + \let\.=\ptexdot + \let\dots=\ptexdots + \let\equiv=\ptexequiv + \let\!=\ptexexclam + \let\i=\ptexi + \let\{=\ptexlbrace + \let\+=\tabalign + \let\}=\ptexrbrace + \let\*=\ptexstar + \let\t=\ptext + % + \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% + \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% + \def\@{@}% +\let\Etex=\endgroup} + +% Define @lisp ... @endlisp. +% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things, +% including the definition of @endlisp (which normally is erroneous). + +% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. +\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in + +% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other +% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't +% have any width. +\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} + +% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword +% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this +% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input +% should produce a line of output anyway. +% +{\obeyspaces % +\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}} + +% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is +% for use in \parsearg. +{\sepspaces% +\global\let\obeyedspace= } + +% This space is always present above and below environments. +\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt + +% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here +% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip +% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the +% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip +% +\def\aboveenvbreak{{\advance\envskipamount by \parskip +\endgraf \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount +\removelastskip \penalty-50 \vskip\envskipamount \fi}} + +\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak + +% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. +\let\nonarrowing=\relax + +% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around +% environment contents. +\font\circle=lcircle10 +\newdimen\circthick +\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner +\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip +\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle +% +\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth +\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} +\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} +\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} +\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip + \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr + \hskip\rskip}} +\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip + \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr + \hskip\rskip}} +% +\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip + +\long\def\cartouche{% +\begingroup + \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip + \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*. + \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip + \advance\cartinner by-\rskip + \cartouter=\hsize + \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either +% side, and for 6pt waste from +% each corner char, and rule thickness + \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip + % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. + \let\nonarrowing=\comment + \vbox\bgroup + \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt + \carttop + \hbox\bgroup + \hskip\lskip + \vrule\kern3pt + \vbox\bgroup + \hsize=\cartinner + \kern3pt + \begingroup + \baselineskip=\normbskip + \lineskip=\normlskip + \parskip=\normpskip + \vskip -\parskip +\def\Ecartouche{% + \endgroup + \kern3pt + \egroup + \kern3pt\vrule + \hskip\rskip + \egroup + \cartbot + \egroup +\endgroup +}} + + +% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, +% inside a group. +\def\nonfillstart{% + \aboveenvbreak + \inENV % This group ends at the end of the body + \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy + \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. + \singlespace + \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines + \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output + \parskip = 0pt + \parindent = 0pt + \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes + % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing + % at next level down. + \ifx\nonarrowing\relax + \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing + \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing + \let\exdent=\nofillexdent + \let\nonarrowing=\relax + \fi +} + +% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular +% environment, so the error checking in \end will work. +% +% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via +% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep +% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be +% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after +% the environment. +% +\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup} + +% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font. +\def\lisp{\begingroup + \nonfillstart + \let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish + \tt + \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. + \gobble % eat return +} + +% @example: Same as @lisp. +\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} + +% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook +% redefines). We must call \example (or whatever) last in the +% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or +% whatever) command. +% +% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an +% @smalldisplay. Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway. +% +\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display} +\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} +\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format} +\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} + +% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts. +% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. +\def\smalllispx{\begingroup + \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% + \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% + \indexfonts + \lisp +} + +% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font. +% +\def\display{\begingroup + \nonfillstart + \let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish + \gobble +} + +% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts. +% +\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup + \def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% + \indexfonts \rm + \display +} + +% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins. +% +\def\format{\begingroup + \let\nonarrowing = t + \nonfillstart + \let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish + \gobble +} + +% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts. +% +\def\smallformatx{\begingroup + \def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% + \indexfonts \rm + \format +} + +% @flushleft (same as @format). +% +\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format} + +% @flushright. +% +\def\flushright{\begingroup + \let\nonarrowing = t + \nonfillstart + \let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish + \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill + \gobble +} + +% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) +% and narrows the margins. +% +\def\quotation{% + \begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body + {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip + \singlespace + \parindent=0pt + % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're + % doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment... + \def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}% + % + % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. + \ifx\nonarrowing\relax + \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing + \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing + \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing + \let\nonarrowing = \relax + \fi +} + + +\message{defuns,} +% Define formatter for defuns +% First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally +\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname} + +\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in +\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt +\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt +\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt + +\newcount\parencount +% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things. +% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in. +\def\activeparens{% +\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active +\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active} + +% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. +\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) + +{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm) + +% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, +% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, +% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. +\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen +\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack + +\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 } +\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} +% This is used to turn on special parens +% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active). +\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr} + +% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions. +% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses. +\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested + \global\advance\parencount by 1 +} +% +% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens. +\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 } +% +\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0. + % also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (. + \ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi + \global\advance \parencount by -1 } +% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards +\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ } +% +\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr} +} % End of definition inside \activeparens +%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the +%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] +\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 } +\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 } +\def\ampnr{\&} +\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} +\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}} + +% First, defname, which formats the header line itself. +% #1 should be the function name. +% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function". + +\def\defname #1#2{% +% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were +% outside the @def... +\dimen2=\leftskip +\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent +\noindent +\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}% +\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line +\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations +\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 +% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) +% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin, +% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking +{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins, +% so that \rightline will obey them. +\advance \hsize by -\dimen2 +\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}% +% Make all lines underfull and no complaints: +\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 +\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent +\exdentamount=\defbodyindent +{\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name +} + +% Actually process the body of a definition +% #1 should be the terminating control sequence, such as \Edefun. +% #2 should be the "another name" control sequence, such as \defunx. +% #3 should be the control sequence that actually processes the header, +% such as \defunheader. + +\def\defparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody +\medbreak % +% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies +% so that it will exit this group. +\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% +\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}% +\parindent=0in +\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent +\exdentamount=\defbodyindent +\begingroup % +\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `=' +\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3} + +% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define). +% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define). +% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing. +% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name. +% +\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV % +\medbreak % +% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies +% so that it will exit this group. +\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% +\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% +\parindent=0in +\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent +\exdentamount=\defbodyindent +\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}} + +% @deftypemethod has an extra argument that nothing else does. Sigh. +% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define). +% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define). +% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing. +% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name. +% #5 is the method's return type. +% +\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV % +\medbreak % +% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies +% so that it will exit this group. +\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% +\def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}% +\parindent=0in +\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent +\exdentamount=\defbodyindent +\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}} + +\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % +\medbreak % +% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies +% so that it will exit this group. +\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% +\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% +\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% +\parindent=0in +\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent +\exdentamount=\defbodyindent +\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} + +% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones +% except that they do not make parens into active characters. +% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments. + +\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{\begingroup\inENV% Environment for definitionbody +\medbreak % +% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies +% so that it will exit this group. +\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% +\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}% +\parindent=0in +\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent +\exdentamount=\defbodyindent +\begingroup % +\catcode 61=\active % +\obeylines\spacesplit#3} + +% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for +% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals. +% +\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{% + \begingroup\inENV % + \medbreak % + % Define the end token that this defining construct specifies + % so that it will exit this group. + \def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% + \def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% + \parindent=0in + \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent + \exdentamount=\defbodyindent + \begingroup\obeylines +} + +\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {% + \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% + \spacesplit{#3{#4}}% +} + +% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the +% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct +% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh. +% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody +% +% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That +% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and +% won't strip off the braces. +% +\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {% + \parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}% + \spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty +} + +% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the +% braces (if any). That's what this does. +% +\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1} + +% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final +% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3 +% (which might be empty) the arguments. +% +\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{% + #1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}% +}% + +\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % +\medbreak % +% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies +% so that it will exit this group. +\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% +\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% +\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% +\parindent=0in +\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent +\exdentamount=\defbodyindent +\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} + +% Split up #2 at the first space token. +% call #1 with two arguments: +% the first is all of #2 before the space token, +% the second is all of #2 after that space token. +% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg +% and the second is passed as empty. + +{\obeylines +\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}% +\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{% +\ifx\relax #3% +#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}} + +% So much for the things common to all kinds of definitions. + +% Define @defun. + +% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun +% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up + +\def\defunargs #1{\functionparens \sl +% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. +% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. +\hyphenchar\tensl=0 +#1% +\hyphenchar\tensl=45 +\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi% +\interlinepenalty=10000 +\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil +\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak +} + +\def\deftypefunargs #1{% +% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. +% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. +% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special. +\boldbraxnoamp +\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars +\interlinepenalty=10000 +\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil +\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak +} + +% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed. + +% @deffn Command forward-char nchars + +\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader} + +\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% +\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup % +\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody +} + +% @defun == @deffn Function + +\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader} + +\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index +\begingroup\defname {#1}{Function}% +\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % +\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody +} + +% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) + +\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader} + +% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args. +\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax} +% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args. +\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{% +\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index +\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Function}% +\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup % +\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody +} + +% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar}) + +\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader} + +% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$ +% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null. +\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$$${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi} + +% #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args. +\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax} +% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args. +\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{% +\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index +\begingroup +\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents +% at least some C++ text from working +\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1}% +\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup % +\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody +} + +% @defmac == @deffn Macro + +\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader} + +\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index +\begingroup\defname {#1}{Macro}% +\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % +\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody +} + +% @defspec == @deffn Special Form + +\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader} + +\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index +\begingroup\defname {#1}{Special Form}% +\defunargs {#2}\endgroup % +\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody +} + +% This definition is run if you use @defunx +% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx. + +\def\deffnx #1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}} +\def\defunx #1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}} +\def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}} +\def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}} +\def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}} +\def\deftypemethodx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}} +\def\deftypefunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}} + +% @defmethod, and so on + +% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG... + +\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}% +\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype} + +\def\defopheader #1#2#3{% +\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index +\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}% +\defunargs {#3}\endgroup % +} + +% @deftypemethod CLASS RETURN-TYPE METHOD ARG... +% +\def\deftypemethod{% + \deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader} +% +% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args. +\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{% + \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index + \begingroup + \defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% + \deftypefunargs{#4}% + \endgroup +} + +% @defmethod == @defop Method +% +\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader} +% +% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args. +\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{% + \dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index + \begingroup + \defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% + \defunargs{#3}% + \endgroup +} + +% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag + +\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}% +\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype} + +\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{% +\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index +\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype{} of #1}% +\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % +} + +% @defivar == @defcv {Instance Variable} + +\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader} + +\def\defivarheader #1#2#3{% +\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{of #1}% Make entry in var index +\begingroup\defname {#2}{Instance Variable of #1}% +\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup % +} + +% These definitions are run if you use @defmethodx, etc., +% anywhere other than immediately after a @defmethod, etc. + +\def\defopx #1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}} +\def\defmethodx #1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}} +\def\defcvx #1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}} +\def\defivarx #1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}} + +% Now @defvar + +% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar. +% This is actually simple: just print them in roman. +% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up +\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1% +\interlinepenalty=10000 +\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak} + +% @defvr Counter foo-count + +\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader} + +\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% +\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup} + +% @defvar == @defvr Variable + +\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader} + +\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index +\begingroup\defname {#1}{Variable}% +\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % +} + +% @defopt == @defvr {User Option} + +\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader} + +\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index +\begingroup\defname {#1}{User Option}% +\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup % +} + +% @deftypevar int foobar + +\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader} + +% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that +% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index. +\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{% +\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index +\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}% +\interlinepenalty=10000 +\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak +\endgroup} +\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}} + +% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable + +\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader} + +\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax% +\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1} +\interlinepenalty=10000 +\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak +\endgroup} + +% This definition is run if you use @defvarx +% anywhere other than immediately after a @defvar or @defvarx. + +\def\defvrx #1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}} +\def\defvarx #1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}} +\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}} +\def\deftypevarx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}} +\def\deftypevrx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}} + +% Now define @deftp +% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar. + +\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}} + +% @deftp Class window height width ... + +\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader} + +\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}% +\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup} + +% This definition is run if you use @deftpx, etc +% anywhere other than immediately after a @deftp, etc. + +\def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}} + + +\message{macros,} +% @macro. + +% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, +% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. +\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined + \newwrite\macscribble + \def\scanmacro#1{% + \begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M + \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp + \immediate\write\macscribble{#1}% + \immediate\closeout\macscribble + \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces + \input \jobname.tmp + \endgroup +} +\else +\def\scanmacro#1{% +\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M +\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1}\endgroup} +\fi + +\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters +\newtoks\macname % Macro name +\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? + +% Utility routines. +% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames. +\def\cslet#1#2{% +\expandafter\expandafter +\expandafter\let +\expandafter\expandafter +\csname#1\endcsname +\csname#2\endcsname} + +% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. +% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). +{\catcode`\@=11 +\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} +\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} +\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} +\def\unbrace#1{#1} +\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} +} + +% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. +{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3% +\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% +\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% +\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% +} + +% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where +% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active +% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. + +% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is +% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro +% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. + +\def\macrobodyctxt{% + \catcode`\~=12 + \catcode`\^=12 + \catcode`\_=12 + \catcode`\|=12 + \catcode`\<=12 + \catcode`\>=12 + \catcode`\+=12 + \catcode`\{=12 + \catcode`\}=12 + \catcode`\@=12 + \catcode`\^^M=12 + \usembodybackslash} + +\def\macroargctxt{% + \catcode`\~=12 + \catcode`\^=12 + \catcode`\_=12 + \catcode`\|=12 + \catcode`\<=12 + \catcode`\>=12 + \catcode`\+=12 + \catcode`\@=12 + \catcode`\\=12} + +% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. +% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N +% where N is the macro parameter number. +% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so +% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. + +{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active + @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} + @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} +} +\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} + +\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} +\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} + +\def\macroxxx#1{% + \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist + \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments + \paramno=0% + \else + \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% + \fi + \expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax + \cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% + \else + \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% + \fi + \begingroup \macrobodyctxt + \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody + \else \expandafter\parsemacbody + \fi} + +\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx} +\def\unmacroxxx#1{% + \expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax + \errmessage{Macro \the\macname\ not defined.}% + \else + \cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% + \expandafter\let \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \undefined + \fi +} + +% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a +% is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by +% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. +\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} +\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} +\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} +\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} + +% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist +% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah +% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. +% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). + +% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. +% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something +% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine +% it to # just before using the token list produced. +% +% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before +% the macro is used. + +\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% + \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} +\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% + \if#1;\let\next=\relax + \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx + \advance\paramno by 1% + \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname + {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% + \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% + \fi\next} + +% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. +% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) + +\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% +{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% +\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% +{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% + +% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and +% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. +% Much magic with \expandafter here. +% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file +% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. +\def\defmacro{% + \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars + \ifrecursive + \ifcase\paramno + % 0 + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% + \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% + \or % 1 + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% + \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt + \noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% + \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% + \else % many + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% + \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt + \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname} + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% + \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% + \expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter\xdef + \expandafter\expandafter + \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname + \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% + \fi + \else + \ifcase\paramno + % 0 + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% + \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% + \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% + \or % 1 + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% + \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt + \noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% + \egroup + \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% + \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% + \else % many + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% + \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt + \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname} + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% + \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% + \expandafter\expandafter + \expandafter\xdef + \expandafter\expandafter + \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname + \paramlist{% + \egroup + \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% + \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% + \fi + \fi} + +\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} + +% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a +% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole +% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence +% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) +\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} +\def\braceorlinexxx{% + \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else + \expandafter\parsearg + \fi \next} + + +\message{cross references,} +\newwrite\auxfile + +\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. +\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. + +% @inforef is relatively simple. +\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} +\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, + node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} + +% @node's job is to define \lastnode. +\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz} +\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]} +\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} +\let\nwnode=\node +\let\lastnode=\relax + +% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these. +\def\donoderef{% + \ifx\lastnode\relax\else + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% + {Ysectionnumberandtype}% + \global\let\lastnode=\relax + \fi +} +\def\unnumbnoderef{% + \ifx\lastnode\relax\else + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}% + \global\let\lastnode=\relax + \fi +} +\def\appendixnoderef{% + \ifx\lastnode\relax\else + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% + {Yappendixletterandtype}% + \global\let\lastnode=\relax + \fi +} + + +% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. +% +\def\anchor#1{\setref{#1}{Ynothing}} + + +% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely +% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT. Called from \foonoderef. We have +% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title +% aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the +% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do. +% +\def\setref#1#2{{% + \indexdummies + \dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% + \dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% + \dosetq{#1-snt}{#2} +}} + +% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is +% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed +% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed +% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. +% +\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} +\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} +\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} +\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup + \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% + \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}% + \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}% + \setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}% + \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt + % No printed node name was explicitly given. + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax + % Use the node name inside the square brackets. + \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% + \else + % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside + % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. + \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt + % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. + \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% + \else + \ifhavexrefs + % We know the real title if we have the xref values. + \def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}% + \else + % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. + \def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% + \fi% + \fi + \fi + \fi + % + % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not + % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will + % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals + % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this + % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it + % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. + \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt + \putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' in \cite{\printedmanual}% + \else + % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the + % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand + % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of + % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the + % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. + {\normalturnoffactive + % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for + % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. + \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% + \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi + }% + % [mynode], + [\printednodename],\space + % page 3 + \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% + \fi +\endgroup} + +% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros + +% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore +% and backslash work in node names. (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.) +\def\dosetq#1#2{% + {\let\folio=0 + \normalturnoffactive + \edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}% + \iflinks + \next + \fi + }% +} + +% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into +% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...} +% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character + +\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}} + +% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq + +\def\Ypagenumber{\folio} + +\def\Ytitle{\thissection} + +\def\Ynothing{} + +\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{% +\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno % +\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno % +\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % +\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % +\else % +\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % +\fi \fi \fi } + +\def\Yappendixletterandtype{% +\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}% +\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno % +\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 % +\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno % +\else % +\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno % +\fi \fi \fi } + +\gdef\xreftie{'tie} + +% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error +% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. +% +\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined + \let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0. +\else + \def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space} +\fi + +% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. +% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. + +\def\refx#1#2{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax + % If not defined, say something at least. + \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright + \iflinks + \ifhavexrefs + \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% + \else + \ifwarnedxrefs\else + \global\warnedxrefstrue + \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% + \fi + \fi + \fi + \else + % It's defined, so just use it. + \csname X#1\endcsname + \fi + #2% Output the suffix in any case. +} + +% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. +% +\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup + % Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument. + \catcode`\\ = 0 + \afterassignment\endgroup + \expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname +} + +% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. +\def\readauxfile{\begingroup + \catcode`\^^@=\other + \catcode`\^^A=\other + \catcode`\^^B=\other + \catcode`\^^C=\other + \catcode`\^^D=\other + \catcode`\^^E=\other + \catcode`\^^F=\other + \catcode`\^^G=\other + \catcode`\^^H=\other + \catcode`\^^K=\other + \catcode`\^^L=\other + \catcode`\^^N=\other + \catcode`\^^P=\other + \catcode`\^^Q=\other + \catcode`\^^R=\other + \catcode`\^^S=\other + \catcode`\^^T=\other + \catcode`\^^U=\other + \catcode`\^^V=\other + \catcode`\^^W=\other + \catcode`\^^X=\other + \catcode`\^^Z=\other + \catcode`\^^[=\other + \catcode`\^^\=\other + \catcode`\^^]=\other + \catcode`\^^^=\other + \catcode`\^^_=\other + \catcode`\@=\other + \catcode`\^=\other + % It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. + % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't + % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, + % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ + % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat + % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first + % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could + % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. + % + % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: + % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter + % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. + % + \catcode`\~=\other + \catcode`\[=\other + \catcode`\]=\other + \catcode`\"=\other + \catcode`\_=\other + \catcode`\|=\other + \catcode`\<=\other + \catcode`\>=\other + \catcode`\$=\other + \catcode`\#=\other + \catcode`\&=\other + \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off + % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters + {% + \count 1=128 + \def\loop{% + \catcode\count 1=\other + \advance\count 1 by 1 + \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi + }% + }% + % The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now). + % Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on + % entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names. + % For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^ + % Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish, + % but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in. + \catcode`\{=1 + \catcode`\}=2 + \catcode`\%=\other + \catcode`\'=0 + \catcode`\\=\other + % + \openin 1 \jobname.aux + \ifeof 1 \else + \closein 1 + \input \jobname.aux + \global\havexrefstrue + \global\warnedobstrue + \fi + % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. + \openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux +\endgroup} + + +% Footnotes. + +\newcount \footnoteno + +% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is +% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a +% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is +% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a +% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) +\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } + +% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. +\let\footnotestyle=\comment + +\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote + +{\catcode `\@=11 +% +% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. +\gdef\footnote{% + \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne + \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% + % + % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the + % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. + \let\@sf\empty + \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi + % + % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. + \unskip + \thisfootno\@sf + \footnotezzz +}% + +% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the +% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. +% +% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses +% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when +% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. +% +\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup + % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the + % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. + % So reset some parameters. + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes + \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox + \floatingpenalty\@MM + \leftskip\z@skip + \rightskip\z@skip + \spaceskip\z@skip + \xspaceskip\z@skip + \parindent\defaultparindent + % + % Hang the footnote text off the number. + \hang + \textindent{\thisfootno}% + % + % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this + % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it + % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. + \footstrut + \futurelet\next\fo@t +} +\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t + \else\let\next\f@t\fi \next} +\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next} +\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot} +\def\@foot{\strut\egroup} + +}%end \catcode `\@=11 + +% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size +% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers +% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. +% +\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} +\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} +\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} +% +\def\setleading#1{% + \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax + \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip + \normalbaselines + \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% + \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip + depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip + }% +} + +% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should +% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the +% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would +% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main +% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). +% +\def\|{% + % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. + \leavevmode + % + % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. + \vadjust{% + % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current + % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. + \vskip-\baselineskip + % + % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So + % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. + \llap{% + % + % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. + \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt + % + % This is the space between the bar and the text. + \hskip 12pt + }% + }% +} + +% For a final copy, take out the rectangles +% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided +% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). +% +\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} + +% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. +% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. +% +% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image +% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get +% undone and the next image would fail. +\openin 1 = epsf.tex +\ifeof 1 \else + \closein 1 + % Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in + % doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan). + \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% + \input epsf.tex +\fi +% +\newif\ifwarnednoepsf +\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to + work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get + it from ftp://ftp.tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} +% +% Only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. +\def\image#1{% + \ifx\epsfbox\undefined + \ifwarnednoepsf \else + \errhelp = \noepsfhelp + \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% + \global\warnednoepsftrue + \fi + \else + \imagexxx #1,,,\finish + \fi +} +% +% Arguments to @image: +% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. +% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. +% #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. +\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% + % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi + % If the image is by itself, center it. + \ifvmode + \nobreak\medskip + \nobreak + \centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}% + \bigbreak + \else + \epsfbox{#1.eps}% + \fi +} + + +\message{paper sizes,} +% And other related parameters. + +\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt + +\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt +\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt +\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt + +% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. +\vbadness = 10000 + +% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. +\hbadness = 2000 + +% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. +\widowpenalty=10000 +\clubpenalty=10000 + +% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're +% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of +% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on +% \hsize. This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format. We +% call this whenever the paper size is set. +% +\def\setemergencystretch{% + \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined + % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. + \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% + \else + \emergencystretch = \hsize + \divide\emergencystretch by 45 + \fi +} + +% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset; +% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip. Then whoever calls us can +% set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip. +% +\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \voffset = #3\relax + \topskip = #6\relax + \splittopskip = \topskip + % + \vsize = #1\relax + \advance\vsize by \topskip + \outervsize = \vsize + \advance\outervsize by 0.6in + \pageheight = \vsize + % + \hsize = #2\relax + \outerhsize = \hsize + \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in + \pagewidth = \hsize + % + \normaloffset = #4\relax + \bindingoffset = #5\relax + % + \parindent = \defaultparindent + \setemergencystretch +} + +% @letterpaper (the default). +\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 + \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt + \setleading{13.2pt}% + % + % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. + \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}% +}} + +% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format. +\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 + \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt + \setleading{12pt}% + % + \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}% + % + \lispnarrowing = 0.3in + \tolerance = 700 + \hfuzz = 1pt + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt + \deftypemargin = 0pt + \defbodyindent = .5cm + % + \let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx + \let\smallexample = \smalllispx + \let\smallformat = \smallformatx + \let\smalllisp = \smalllispx +}} + +% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. +\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 + \setleading{12pt}% + \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt + % + \internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}% + % + \tolerance = 700 + \hfuzz = 1pt +}} + +% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin +% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm. +\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 + \setleading{13.6pt}% + % + \afourpaper + \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}% + % + \globaldefs = 0 +}} + +% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format. +\def\afourwide{% + \afourpaper + \internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}% + % + \globaldefs = 0 +} + +% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] +% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, +% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. +% +\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx} +\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} +\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi + \globaldefs = 1 + % + \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt + \setleading{13.2pt}% + % + \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}% +}} + +% Set default to letter. +% +\letterpaper + +\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} + +% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. +\catcode`\"=\other +\catcode`\~=\other +\catcode`\^=\other +\catcode`\_=\other +\catcode`\|=\other +\catcode`\<=\other +\catcode`\>=\other +\catcode`\+=\other +\def\normaldoublequote{"} +\def\normaltilde{~} +\def\normalcaret{^} +\def\normalunderscore{_} +\def\normalverticalbar{|} +\def\normalless{<} +\def\normalgreater{>} +\def\normalplus{+} + +% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont +% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts, +% where something hairier probably needs to be done. +% +% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print +% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero +% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all +% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. +% +\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\the\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} + +% Turn off all special characters except @ +% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). +% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can +% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. + +\catcode`\"=\active +\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} +\let"=\activedoublequote +\catcode`\~=\active +\def~{{\tt\char126}} +\chardef\hat=`\^ +\catcode`\^=\active +\def^{{\tt \hat}} + +\catcode`\_=\active +\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} +% Subroutine for the previous macro. +\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}} + +\catcode`\|=\active +\def|{{\tt\char124}} +\chardef \less=`\< +\catcode`\<=\active +\def<{{\tt \less}} +\chardef \gtr=`\> +\catcode`\>=\active +\def>{{\tt \gtr}} +\catcode`\+=\active +\def+{{\tt \char 43}} +%\catcode 27=\active +%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$} + +% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time. +{\catcode`\==\active +\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}} + +\catcode`+=\active +\catcode`\_=\active + +% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file +% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. +% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. +% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. +\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} + +\catcode`\@=0 + +% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font +\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\ +%{\catcode`\\=\other +%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}} + +% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx. +{\catcode`\\=\active +@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }} + +% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. +\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}} + +% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. +\escapechar=`\@ + +% \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q +\catcode`\\=\active + +% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters +% even after parsing them. +@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote +@let\=@realbackslash +@let~=@normaltilde +@let^=@normalcaret +@let_=@normalunderscore +@let|=@normalverticalbar +@let<=@normalless +@let>=@normalgreater +@let+=@normalplus} + +@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote +@let\=@normalbackslash +@let~=@normaltilde +@let^=@normalcaret +@let_=@normalunderscore +@let|=@normalverticalbar +@let<=@normalless +@let>=@normalgreater +@let+=@normalplus} + +% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. +% This is canceled by @fixbackslash. +@otherifyactive + +% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. +% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing +% a backslash. +% +@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} +@global@let\ = @eatinput + +% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then +% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix +% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. +% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input +% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. +% +@gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi + @catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active} + +% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. The @rm below +% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10 +@catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other + +@textfonts +@rm + +@c Local variables: +@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) +@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" +@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" +@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d" +@c time-stamp-end: "}" +@c End: diff --git a/texinice.tex b/texinice.tex new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e7be39 --- /dev/null +++ b/texinice.tex @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ +@tex % -*-tex-*- +% +% $Id: texinice.tex,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ +% +% Make Texinfo printed output look nice +% +% (c) 1998 Mark Wooding +% + +%----- Licensing notice ----------------------------------------------------- +% +% This file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +% it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +% the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +% (at your option) any later version. +% +% This file is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +% GNU General Public License for more details. +% +% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +% along with this file; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +% Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +%----- Revision history ----------------------------------------------------- +% +% $Log: texinice.tex,v $ +% Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw +% Initial revision +% + +\global\parskip = 10pt +\global\parindent = 0pt +\global\defaultparindent = 0pt + +\global\smallskipamount = 6pt + +\gdef\afourpaper{ + \global\tolerance=700 + \global\hfuzz=1pt + \setleading{12pt} + \global\topskip = 36pt + %%% NO!!! \global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt + + \global\vsize= 53\baselineskip + \global\advance\vsize by \topskip + \global\hsize= 5.85in % A4 wide 10pt + %\global\hsize= 6.5in + \global\outerhsize=\hsize + \global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in + \global\outervsize=\vsize + \global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in + + \global\pagewidth=\hsize + \global\pageheight=\vsize +} + +\global\contentsrightmargin = 0pt + +\global\font\textrm = pplr7t at 10pt +\global\font\texttt = pcrr7tn at 10pt +\global\font\textbf = pplb7t at 10pt +\global\font\textit = pplri7t at 10pt +%\global\font\textsl = pplro7t at 10pt +\global\let\textsl = \textit +\global\font\textsc = pplrc7t at 10pt +\global\font\textsf = phvr7t at 10pt +\global\font\textttsl = pcrro7t at 10pt + +\global\let\defbf = \textbf +\global\let\deftt = \texttt + +\global\font\ninett = pcrr7tn at 9pt +\global\font\indrm = pplr7t at 9pt +\global\font\intit = pplri7t at 9pt +%\global\font\indsl = pplro7t at 9pt +\global\let\indsl = \indit +\global\let\indtt = \ninett +\global\let\indttsl = \ninett +\global\let\indsf = \indrm +\global\let\indbf = \indrm +\global\font\indsc = pplrc7t at 9pt + +\global\font\chaprm = phvb7t at 14.4pt +\global\font\chapsl = phvbo7t at 14.4pt +\global\let\chapit = \chapsl +\global\font\chaptt = pcrb7t at 14.4pt +\global\font\chapttsl = pcrbo7t at 14.4pt +\global\let\chapsf = \chaprm +\global\font\chapsc = phvbc7t at 14.4pt +\global\let\chapbf = \chaprm + +\global\font\secrm = phvb7t at 12pt +\global\font\secsl = phvbo7t at 12pt +\global\let\secit = \secsl +\global\font\sectt = pcrb7t at 12pt +\global\font\secttsl = pcrbo7t at 12pt +\global\let\secsf = \secrm +\global\font\secsc = phvbc7t at 12pt +\global\let\secbf = \secrm + +\global\font\ssecrm = phvb7t at 10pt +\global\font\ssecsl = phvbo7t at 10pt +\global\let\ssecit = \ssecsl +\global\font\ssectt = pcrb7t at 10pt +\global\font\ssecttsl = pcrbo7t at 10pt +\global\let\ssecsf = \ssecrm +\global\font\ssecsc = phvbc7t at 10pt +\global\let\ssecbf = \ssecrm + +\global\font\titlerm = phvb7t at 20pt +\global\let\authorrm = \secrm + +% \gdef\var#1{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\textit#1\/$\rangle$}} + +%----- That's all, folks ---------------------------------------------------- + +@end tex +@textfonts +@textrm +@raggedbottom diff --git a/txtlib.in b/txtlib.in new file mode 100755 index 0000000..e8fb938 --- /dev/null +++ b/txtlib.in @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +#! /bin/sh + +# -*-sh-*- +# +# $Id: txtlib.in,v 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw Exp $ +# +# Manipulate simple libraries of text chunks +# +# (c) 1997 Mark Wooding +# + +#----- Licensing notice ----------------------------------------------------- +# +# This file is part of the Common Files Distribution (`common'). +# +# `Common' is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or +# (at your option) any later version. +# +# `Common' is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with `common'; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, +# Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +#----- Revision history ----------------------------------------------------- +# +# $Log: txtlib.in,v $ +# Revision 1.1 1999/05/05 19:23:47 mdw +# Initial revision +# + +# --- Handle command line arguments --- + +files="" +mode=x +out="" + +# --- Parse command line arguments --- + +while [ $# -gt 0 ]; do + case $1 in + -h | --h | --he | --hel | --help) + cat <&2 + exit 1 + ;; + *) + break + ;; + esac + shift +done + +test "$out" = "-" && out="" + +# --- Build a `sed' script --- + +case $mode in + l) + sed -n -e "/^.*\*@-\([-a-zA-Z0-9_]*\)-@\*.*$/ s//\1/p" "$@" + ;; + x) + t=/tmp/txtlib.$$ + if mkdir -m 700 $t; then : + else + echo >&2 "txtlib: could not create temporary directory" + exit 1 + fi + sedfile=/$t/sed + while read LINE; do + echo "/\*@-$LINE-@\*/,/\*@-#-@\*/ p" + done >$sedfile + test -z "$out" || exec >$out + sed -e '/\*@-[-a-zA-Z0-9_]*-@\*/ i\ + *@-#-@*' "$@" | sed -n -f $sedfile | sed -e '/\*@-#-@\*/ d' + rm -rf $t + ;; +esac diff --git a/ylwrap b/ylwrap new file mode 100755 index 0000000..fbae17b --- /dev/null +++ b/ylwrap @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +#! /bin/sh +# ylwrap - wrapper for lex/yacc invocations. +# Copyright (C) 1996, 1997 Free Software Foundation, Inc. +# Written by Tom Tromey . +# +# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify +# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by +# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) +# any later version. +# +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of +# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the +# GNU General Public License for more details. +# +# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License +# along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software +# Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. + +# Usage: +# ylwrap PROGRAM INPUT [OUTPUT DESIRED]... -- [ARGS]... +# * PROGRAM is program to run. +# * INPUT is the input file +# * OUTPUT is file PROG generates +# * DESIRED is file we actually want +# * ARGS are passed to PROG +# Any number of OUTPUT,DESIRED pairs may be used. + +# The program to run. +prog="$1" +shift + +# The input. +input="$1" +shift +case "$input" in + /*) + # Absolute path; do nothing. + ;; + *) + # Relative path. Make it absolute. Why? Because otherwise any + # debugging info in the generated file will point to the wrong + # place. This is really gross. + input="`pwd`/$input" + ;; +esac + +pairlist= +while test "$#" -ne 0; do + if test "$1" = "--"; then + break + fi + pairlist="$pairlist $1" + shift +done + +# FIXME: add hostname here for parallel makes that run commands on +# other machines. But that might take us over the 14-char limit. +dirname=ylwrap$$ +trap "cd `pwd`; rm -rf $dirname > /dev/null 2>&1" 1 2 3 15 +mkdir $dirname || exit 1 + +cd $dirname +$prog ${1+"$@"} "$input" +status=$? + +if test $status -eq 0; then + set X $pairlist + shift + first=yes + while test "$#" -ne 0; do + if test -f "$1"; then + # If $2 is an absolute path name, then just use that, + # otherwise prepend `../'. + case "$2" in + /*) target="$2";; + *) target="../$2";; + esac + mv "$1" "$target" || status=$? + else + # A missing file is only an error for the first file. This + # is a blatant hack to let us support using "yacc -d". If -d + # is not specified, we don't want an error when the header + # file is "missing". + if test $first = yes; then + status=1 + fi + fi + shift + shift + first=no + done +else + status=$? +fi + +# Remove the directory. +cd .. +rm -rf $dirname + +exit $status